BR112015026109B1 - surgical instrument - Google Patents

Abstract

SURGICAL STAPLER EQUIPPED WITH ENGINE. The present invention relates to a surgical instrument which may comprise a handle, a motor and a shaft extending from the handle. The handle and/or axis may define a longitudinal axis. The surgical instrument may additionally comprise a cartridge of fasteners comprising a plurality of fasteners releasably stored therein, an anvil configured to deform the fasteners, a closure drive configured to move the anvil toward and away from the cartridge of fasteners, which is rotatable about the longitudinal axis, and a trigger drive configured to deploy the fasteners from the fastener cartridge, which is rotatable about the longitudinal axis. The surgical instrument may further comprise a transmission comprising a first operational configuration which connects the motor to the closing drive, and a second operational configuration which connects the motor to the triggering drive.

Description

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED ORDERS

[0001] The present non-provisional patent application claims benefit under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) of copending provisional patent application US Serial No. 61/812,365 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS PERFORMED BY A SINGLE MOTOR, filed April 16, 2013, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The present non-provisional patent application also claims the benefit under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) of copending provisional patent application US Serial No. 61/812,376 entitled LINEAR CUTTER WITH POWER, filed April 16, 2013, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The present non-provisional patent application also claims the benefit under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) of copending provisional patent application US Serial No. 61/812,382 entitled LINEAR CUTTER WITH MOTOR AND PISTOL GRIP, filed April 16, 2013, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The present non-provisional patent application also claims the benefit under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) of pending US provisional patent application Serial No. 61/812,385, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HANDLE WITH MULTIPLE ACTUATION MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL, filed April 16, 2013, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The present non-provisional patent application also claims the benefit under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) of copending Provisional US Patent Application Serial No. 61/812,372, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS PERFORMED BY A SINGLE MOTOR, filed April 16, 2013, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND

[0002] Various forms of the invention relate to surgical instruments and, in various embodiments, to surgical cutting and stapling instruments, and staple cartridges therefor, which are designed to cut and staple tissue.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0003] The features and advantages of this invention, and the manner of obtaining them, will become more apparent, and the invention itself will be better understood, by referring to the following description of embodiments of the invention, considered in conjunction with the drawings at attachment, where:

[0004] Figure 1 is a perspective view of a modular surgical system that includes a motor-driven surgical instrument and three interchangeable end actuators;

[0005] Figure 2 is a side perspective view of the motor-driven surgical instrument, with a portion of the cable compartment removed for clarity;

[0006] Figure 3 is a partial exploded view of the surgical instrument assembly of Figure 2;

[0007] Figure 4 is another partial exploded view of the surgical instrument assembly of Figures 2 and 3;

[0008] Figure 5 is a side elevation view of the motor-driven surgical instrument, with a portion of the cable compartment removed;

[0009] Figure 6 is a perspective view of a drive system by engine and transmission set, with the transmission set in the first drive position, in which the actuation of the engine will result in the actuation of a first drive system of the surgical instrument of Figures 2-5;

[0010] Figure 6A is a perspective view of an alternative transmission car with locking means;

[0011] Figure 6B is a perspective view of an engine drive system and transmission assembly including the transmission car of Figure 6A with the transmission assembly in the first drive position, in which motor actuation will result in actuation of the first drive system and the second drive system is locked by the locking means;

[0012] Figure 6C is a perspective view of the motor drive system and transmission set of Figure 6B with the transmission set in the second drive position and the motor actuation will result in the actuation of the second drive system and the first drive system is locked by the locking means;

[0013] Figure 7 is another perspective view of the motor drive system and transmission set of Figure 6 with the transmission set in the second drive position and the motor actuation will result in the actuation of the second drive system;

[0014] Figure 8 is a side elevation view of another motor-driven surgical instrument with a portion of the cable compartment and other portions thereof omitted for clarity;

[0015] Figure 9 is a perspective view of the engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of the surgical instrument of Figure 8 with the transmission assembly thereof in the first driving position;

[0016] Figure 10 is an elevational cross-sectional view of the engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of Figure 9 with the transmission assembly in the first driving position;

[0017] Figure 11 is another perspective view of the engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of Figures 9 and 10 with the transmission assembly in the second driving position;

[0018] Figure 12 is another cross-sectional view of the engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of Figures 9-11 with the transmission assembly in the second driving position;

[0019] Figure 13 is a partial rear perspective view of a portion of another motor-driven surgical instrument;

[0020] Figure 14 is a side elevation view of the engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of the surgical instrument of Figure 13;

[0021] Figure 15 is a cross-sectional view of the surgical instrument drive assembly of Figures 13 and 14 in a first driving position;

[0022] Figure 16 is another cross-sectional view of the surgical instrument drive assembly of Figures 13-15 in a second driving position;

[0023] Figure 17 is a perspective view of another arrangement of the motor-driven surgical instrument with a portion of the housing removed for clarity;

[0024] Figure 18 is a perspective view of an engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of the surgical instrument of Figure 17;

[0025] Figure 19 is an exploded view of the engine assembly, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of Figure 18;

[0026] Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of portions of the engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of Figures 18 and 19 with the transmission shaft assembly thereof in a first driving position;

[0027] Figure 21 is another cross-sectional view of portions of the engine, transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems of Figure 20, with the drive shaft assembly thereof in a second driving position;

[0028] Figure 22 is a perspective view of another motor, transmission assembly, and first and second drive systems of a form of a surgical instrument of the present invention;

[0029] Figure 23 is an exploded view of the engine assembly, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of Figure 22;

[0030] Figure 24 is a cross-sectional view of the engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of Figures 22 and 23 with the transmission assembly in the first driving position;

[0031] Figure 25 is another cross-sectional view of the engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems of Figures 22-24 with the transmission assembly in a second driving position;

[0032] Figure 26 is another cross-sectional view of the engine and transmission assembly of Figures 22-25, with the transmission assembly in the first drive position;

[0033] Figure 27 is another cross-sectional view of the engine and transmission assembly of Figures 22-26, with the transmission assembly in the second drive position;

[0034] Figure 28 is a side elevational view of a portion of another motor-driven surgical instrument, with a portion of the housing omitted for clarity;

[0035] Figure 29 is a perspective view of a portion of another motor-driven surgical instrument, with a portion of the housing omitted for clarity;

[0036] Figure 30 is a front perspective view of a motor driven unit with first and second rotary drive systems;

[0037] Figure 31 is a bottom perspective view of the motor-drive unit of Figure 30;

[0038] Figure 32 is a perspective view of the motor-driven unit of Figures 31 and 32 with the housing removed therefrom;

[0039] Figure 33 is an exploded view of a mechanical coupling system assembly for operatively coupling four rotary drive shafts together;

[0040] Figure 34 is a front perspective view of a surgical end actuator with a portion of the end actuator housing removed for clarity;

[0041] Figure 35 is another front perspective view of the surgical end actuator of Figure 34 with portions of the closure system and lower jaw omitted for clarity;

[0042] Figure 36 is an exploded perspective view of the surgical end actuator assembly of Figures 34 and 35;

[0043] Figure 37 is a side elevation view of the surgical end actuator of Figures 33-36 with a portion of the housing omitted for clarity;

[0044] Figure 38 is a left side perspective view of another end actuator arrangement with a portion of the end actuator housing omitted for clarity;

[0045] Figure 39 is an exploded view of the end actuator assembly of Figure 38;

[0046] Figure 40 is a right side perspective view of the end actuator arrangement of Figures 37 and 38 with another portion of the end actuator housing omitted for clarity;

[0047] Figure 41 is a cross-sectional view of the surgical end actuator arrangement of Figures 38-40

[0048] Figure 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view of another surgical end actuator;

[0049] Figure 43 is a partial exploded view of the surgical end actuator assembly of Figure 42;

[0050] Figure 44 is another partial perspective view of a portion of the surgical end actuator of Figures 42 and 43;

[0051] Figure 45 is another cross-sectional view of the surgical end actuator of Figures 42-44

[0052] Figure 46 is a perspective view of an end actuator arrangement with a drive release assembly;

[0053] Figure 47 is a partial perspective view of the surgical end actuator of Figure 46 with portions thereof omitted for clarity and with the proximal drive train portion of the closure system separated from the distal drive train portion of the closing system;

[0054] Figure 48 is a partial perspective view of the surgical end actuator of Figures 46 and 47 with portions thereof omitted for clarity and with the distal coupler member seated within the slot in the proximal coupler member and the coupler pin of drive removed from it;

[0055] Figure 49 is another partial perspective view of the surgical end actuator of Figure 48 showing portions of the end actuator triggering system;

[0056] Figure 50 is a perspective view of another arrangement of the surgical end actuator;

[0057] Figure 50A is an enlarged view of a portion of the surgical end actuator of Figure 50;

[0058] Figure 51 is a perspective view of a portion of the end actuator of Figure 50 with a housing portion omitted for clarity;

[0059] Figure 52 is another perspective view of the end actuator of Figures 50 and 51 with portions of the closure and housing system omitted for clarity;

[0060] Figure 53 is another perspective view of the end actuator of Figures 50-52 with portions of the closure system and a portion of the housing omitted for clarity;

[0061] Figure 54 is a perspective view of another end actuator that is equipped with a drive release assembly;

[0062] Figure 55 is a side elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 54;

[0063] Figure 56 is a perspective view of a portion of the end actuator of Figures 54 and 55 with a portion of the end actuator housing omitted for clarity;

[0064] Figure 57 is another perspective view of the end actuator of Figures 54-56 with the tool head thereof in a closed position;

[0065] Figure 58 is another partial perspective view of the end actuator of Figure 57 with a portion of the end actuator housing omitted for clarity;

[0066] Figure 59 is another perspective view of the end actuator of Figure 58 with the drive coupler pin removed;

[0067] Figure 60 is another perspective view of the end actuator of Figure 59 with the drive coupler pin removed and the closing drive beam assembly moved proximally to the tool head opening;

[0068] Figure 61 is a block diagram of a modular motor-driven surgical instrument comprising a handle portion and a shaft portion;

[0069] Figure 62 is a table depicting the total time to complete a stroke and load current requirements for various operations of the device's various axes;

[0070] Figure 63, which is divided into Figures 63-A and 63-B, is a detailed diagram of the electrical system in the handle portion of the modular motor-driven surgical instrument;

[0071] Figure 64 is a block diagram of the electrical system of the shaft and handle portions of the modular motor-driven surgical instrument;

[0072] Figure 65 illustrates a mechanical switching motion control system to eliminate microprocessor control of motor functions;

[0073] Figure 66 is a perspective view of a coupling arrangement comprising a coupler compartment and a pair of sockets within the coupler compartment, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure;

[0074] Figure 67 is a perspective view, in cross section, of the coupling arrangement of Figure 66, depicting a pair of drive members decoupled from the pair of sockets and further depicting the coupling arrangement in an unlocked configuration, in accordance with various modalities of the present disclosure;

[0075] Figure 68 is a perspective view, in cross section, of the coupling arrangement of Figure 66, depicting the pair of drive members coupled to the pair of sockets and further representing the coupling arrangement in a locked configuration, in accordance with various modalities of the present disclosure;

[0076] Figure 69 is a perspective view, in cross section, of the coupling arrangement of Figure 66, depicting the pair of drive members coupled to the pair of sockets and further depicting the coupling arrangement in an unlocked configuration, in accordance with various modalities of the present disclosure;

[0077] Figure 70 is a perspective view of an insert of the coupling arrangement of Figure 66, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure;

[0078] Figure 71 is a perspective view of a socket of the coupling arrangement of Figure 66, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure;

[0079] Figure 72 is a perspective view of a latch of the coupling arrangement of Figure 66, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure;

[0080] Figure 73 is a perspective view, in cross section, of a surgical end actuator attachment for use with a surgical instrument handle, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure;

[0081] Figure 74 is an exploded perspective view of the surgical end actuator attachment drive systems of Figure 73, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure;

[0082] Figure 75 is a perspective view of a handle for a surgical instrument, the handle comprising a drive system having a first output drive assembly and a second output drive assembly, in accordance with various embodiments. of the present revelation;

[0083] Figure 76 is a perspective view of the drive system of Figure 75, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure;

[0084] Figure 77 is an elevational, cross-sectional view of the cable of Figure 75, depicting the drive system engaged with the first output drive assembly and disengaged from the second output drive assembly, in accordance with various embodiments of the present revelation;

[0085] Figure 78 is an elevational, cross-sectional view of the drive system of Figure 75, depicting the drive system engaged with the second output drive assembly and disengaged from the first output drive assembly, in accordance with various modalities of the present disclosure;

[0086] Figure 79 is a perspective view in partial cross-section of a surgical instrument including a rotary drive shaft, a closure drive operable by said drive shaft, and a trigger drive operable by said drive shaft, being that a close trigger is illustrated in a partially open configuration and the trigger trigger is illustrated in an untriggered configuration;

[0087] Figure 80 is a perspective view of the rotary drive shaft of Figure 79;

[0088] Figure 81 is a perspective view in partial cross-section of the surgical instrument of Figure 79 illustrated with the closing trigger in an open configuration and the trigger trigger in an untriggered configuration;

[0089] Figure 82 is a perspective view in partial cross-section of the surgical instrument of Figure 79 illustrated with the closing trigger in a closed configuration and the trigger trigger in an untriggered configuration;

[0090] Figure 83 is a perspective view in partial cross-section of the surgical instrument of Figure 79 illustrated with the closing trigger in a closed configuration and the trigger trigger in a triggered configuration;

[0091] Figure 84 is a perspective view in partial cross-section of the surgical instrument of Figure 79 illustrated with the trigger trigger in a retracted configuration and trigger close in the process of being reopened;

[0092] Figure 85 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end actuator and a shaft of a surgical instrument illustrated in an unfired, closed configuration;

[0093] Figure 86 is a perspective view of a transmission for operating the surgical instrument of Figure 85 illustrated in a configuration corresponding to the configuration of Figure 85; 85;

[0094] Figure 87 is an exploded view of the transmission of Figure 86;

[0095] Figure 88 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator and shaft of Figure 85 illustrated in an open, unfired configuration;

[0096] Figure 89 is a perspective view of the transmission of Figure 86 illustrated in a configuration corresponding to the configuration illustrated in Figure 88;

[0097] Figure 90 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator and shaft of Figure 85 illustrated in an unfired, closed configuration;

[0098] Figure 91 is a perspective view of the transmission of Figure 86 illustrated in a configuration corresponding to the configuration illustrated in Figure 90;

[0099] Figure 92 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator and shaft of Figure 85 illustrated in a fired, closed configuration;

[0100] Figure 93 is a perspective view of the transmission of Figure 86 illustrated in a configuration corresponding to the configuration illustrated in Figure 92;

[0101] Figure 94 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[0102] Figure 95 is an exploded view of a handle of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 94;

[0103] Figure 96 is an exploded view of an end actuator of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 94;

[0104] Figure 97 is a partial perspective view of a motor and gear set of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 94;

[0105] Figure 98 is a cross-sectional elevation view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 94;

[0106] Figure 99 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument, according to at least one embodiment, illustrated in an unlocked, open condition;

[0107] Figure 100 is a perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 99 illustrated in an unlocked, closed condition;

[0108] Figure 101 is a perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 99 illustrated in a locked, closed condition;

[0109] Figure 102 is a plan view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 99; 99;

[0110] Figure 103 is a cross-sectional view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 99;

[0111] Figure 104 is a cross-sectional view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 99;

[0112] Figure 105 is an exploded view of a triggering trigger of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 99;

[0113] Figure 106 is an exploded view of a closing drive of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 99;

[0114] Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment comprising a handle, a shaft, and an end actuator;

[0115] Figure 108 is a cross-sectional view of the handle of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 107 illustrated in an open configuration;

[0116] Figure 109 is a cross-sectional view of the handle of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 107 illustrated in a closed configuration;

[0117] Figure 110 is a perspective view of the handle of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 107 illustrated with some components removed;

[0118] Figure 111 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment comprising a handle and a shaft;

[0119] Figure 112 is a perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 111 illustrating the handle separated from the shaft;

[0120] Figure 113 is an exploded view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 111;

[0121] Figure 114 is a partial cross-sectional view of the handle of Figure 111 illustrating a transmission operatively engaged with a closure system of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 111;

[0122] Figure 115 is a partial cross-sectional view of the cable of Figure 111 illustrating the transmission of Figure 114 operatively engaged with a triggering system of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 111;

[0123] Figure 116 is an exploded view of the transmission of Figure 114;

[0124] Figure 117 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment illustrated with some components removed and illustrated in an open configuration;

[0125] Figure 118 is a perspective view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 117 illustrated with some components removed and illustrated in a closed configuration;

[0126] Figure 119 is a perspective view of another end actuator arrangement and a clamp pack embodiment therefor prior to installing the clamp pack on the end actuator;

[0127] Figure 120 is another perspective view of the end actuator and clamp package of Figure 119 with the clamp package installed in the end actuator; and

[0128] Figure 121 is another perspective view of the end actuator and staple pack of Figure 120 with the staple pack guard member removed therefrom.

[0129] Corresponding reference characters indicate the corresponding parts across the various views. The exemplifications described herein illustrate preferred embodiments of the invention, in one form, and such exemplifications should not be considered in any way as limiting the scope of the invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

[0130] The applicant of the present application is the author of the following patent applications that were filed on March 01, 2013 and which are all hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety: - US Patent Application Serial No. 13 /782,295, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH CONDUCTIVE PATHWAYS FOR SIGNAL COMMUNICATION; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782,323, entitled ROTARY POWERED ARTICULATION JOINTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782,338, entitled THUMBWHEEL SWITCH ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782,499, entitled ELECTROMECHANICAL SURGICAL DEVICE WITH SIGNAL RELAY ARRANGEMENT; - US patent application serial no. 13/782,460, entitled MULTIPLE PROCESSOR MOTOR CONTROL FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782,358, entitled JOYSTICK SWITCH ASSEMBLIES FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782,481, entitled SENSOR STRAIGHTENED END EFFECTOR DURING REMOVAL THROUGH TROCAR; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782,518, entitled CONTROL METHODS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH REMOVABLE IMPLEMENT PORTIONS; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782,375 entitled ROTARY POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH MULTIPLE DEGREES OF FREEDOM; and - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/782,536 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SOFT STOP are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0131] The applicant of the present application is also the author of the following patent applications that were filed on March 14, 2013 and which are each incorporated herein by reference in their respective entirety: - US Patent Application No. series 13/803,097, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN FIRING DRIVE; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,193, entitled CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS FOR A DRIVE MEMBER OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,053, entitled INTERCHANGEABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES FOR USE WITH A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,086, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,210, entitled SENSOR ARRANGEMENTS FOR ABSOLUTE POSITIONING SYSTEM FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,148, entitled MULTIFUNCTION MOTOR FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,066, entitled DRIVE SYSTEM LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,117, entitled ARTICULATION CONTROL SYSTEM FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,130, entitled DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; and - US Patent Application Serial No. 13/803,159, entitled METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT.

[0132] The applicant of the present application is also the author of the following patent applications that were filed on March 25, 2014 and which are each incorporated herein by reference in their respective entirety: US Patent Application No. serial 14/226,106 entitled POWER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,099 entitled STERILIZATION VERIFICATION CIRCUIT; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,094 entitled VERIFICATION OF NUMBER OF BATTERY EXCHANGES/PROCEDURE COUNT; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,117 entitled POWER MANAGEMENT THROUGH SLEEP OPTIONS OF SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND WAKE UP CONTROL; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,075 entitled MODULAR POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH DETACHABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,093 entitled FEEDBACK ALGORITHMS FOR MANUAL BAILOUT SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,116 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT UTILIZING SENSOR ADAPTATION; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,071 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT HAVING A SAFETY PROCESSOR; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,097 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING INTERACTIVE SYSTEMS; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,126 entitled INTERFACE SYSTEMS FOR USE WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,133 entitled MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,081 entitled SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A SEGMENTED CIRCUIT; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,076 entitled POWER MANAGEMENT THROUGH SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND VARIABLE VOLTAGE PROTECTION; US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,111 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM; and US Patent Application Serial No. 14/226,125 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A ROTATABLE SHAFT.

[0133] The applicant of the present application is also the author of the following patent applications which were filed on the same date as the present application and which are all incorporated herein by reference in their entirety: - US patent application serial no. , entitled MOTOR DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH LOCKABLE DUAL DRIVE SHAFTS, attorney's document no. END740612USNP/140054; - US Patent Application Serial No., entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A CLOSING DRIVE AND A FIRING DRIVE OPERATED FROM THE SAME ROTATABLE OUTPUT, Attorney Document No. END7407USNP/140055; - US Patent Application Serial No., entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SHAFT INCLUDING SWITCHES FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF THE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, Attorney Document No. END7408U-SNP/140056; - US Patent Application Serial No., entitled POWERED LINEAR SURGICAL STAPLER, Attorney Document No. END7409USNP/140057; - US Patent Application Serial No., entitled TRANSMISSION ARRANGEMENT FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, Attorney Document No. END7410USNP/140058; - US Patent Application Serial No., entitled MODULAR MOTOR DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH ALIGNMENT FEATURES FOR ALIGNING ROTARY DRIVE SHAFTS WITH SURGICAL END EFFECTOR SHAFTS, Attorney's Document No. END7411USNP/140059; - US Patent Application Serial No., entitled DRIVE SYSTEM DECOUPLING ARRANGEMENT FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, Attorney Document No. END7413U-SNP/140061; and - US patent application serial no., entitled MODULAR MOTOR DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH STATUS INDICATION ARRANGEMENTS, attorney's document no. END7414USNP/140062.

[0134] Certain exemplifying modalities will now be described to provide a general understanding of the principles of structure, function, fabrication and use of the devices and methods disclosed herein. One or more examples of such embodiments are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. Those skilled in the art will understand that the devices and methods specifically described herein and illustrated in the accompanying drawings are exemplary, non-limiting embodiments, and that the scope of the various embodiments of the present invention is defined solely by the claims. Features illustrated or described in connection with one exemplary embodiment may be combined with features of other embodiments. Such modifications and variations are intended to be included within the scope of the present invention.

[0135] Throughout this specification, the terms "several modalities", "some modalities", "one modality" or "the modality", or the like, mean that a specific feature, structure or characteristic described together with the modality is included in at least one modality. Thus, the appearance of the expressions "in several modalities", "in some modalities", "in a modality" or "in the modality", or similar, in places throughout the descriptive report are not necessarily referring to the same modality. . In addition, specific features, structures or features can be combined in any suitable way in one or more modalities. Therefore, the specific features, structures or characteristics illustrated or described in conjunction with one modality may be combined, in whole or in part, with the structures of the features or characteristics of one or more other modality, without limitation. Such modifications and variations are intended to be included within the scope of the present invention.

[0136] The terms "proximal" and "distal" are used in the present invention with reference to a physician who manipulates the handle portion of the surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the portion closest to the physician, and the term "distal" refers to the portion located away from the physician. It will also be understood that, for the sake of convenience and clarity, spatial terms such as "vertical", "horizontal", "upwards" and "downwards" may be used in the present invention in connection with the drawings. However, surgical instruments can be used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are not intended to be limiting and/or absolute.

[0137] Various devices and exemplifying methods are presented for performing laparoscopic and minimally invasive surgical procedures. However, one of skill in the art will readily understand that the various methods and devices described herein can be used in numerous surgical procedures and applications including, for example, those in conjunction with open surgical procedures. As the present Detailed Description proceeds, those skilled in the art will further understand that the various instruments presented in the present invention may be inserted into a body in any manner, such as through a natural orifice, through an incision or perforation formed in the fabric, etc. The functional portions or end actuator portions of the instruments may be inserted directly into a patient's body or may be inserted through an access device which has a working channel through which the end actuator and shaft can be advanced. length of a surgical instrument.

[0138] Returning to the drawings, where like numerals designate similar components across the various views, Figure 1 depicts a modular surgical instrument system generally designated as 2 which, in one form, includes a motor-driven instrument system 10 that can be used in connection with a variety of surgical end actuators, such as 1000, 2000 and 3000 end actuators. In the illustrated embodiment, the motor-driven surgical instrument 10 includes a housing 12 consisting of a cable 14 that it is configured to be grabbed, manipulated and triggered by a doctor. As the present Detailed Description proceeds, it should be understood that the various unique and innovative arrangements of the actuation system depicted in connection with the cable 14, as well as the various arrangements of the end actuator disclosed in the present invention can also be used effectively. in connection with robot-controlled surgical systems. Thus, the term "compartment" can also include a compartment or similar portion of a robotic system, which can house or otherwise operationally support various forms of the drive systems represented in the present invention, and which can be configured to generate control movements that can be used to drive the end actuator arrangements described in the present invention and their respective equivalent structures. The term "frame" may refer to a portion of a hand-held surgical instrument. The term "frame" may also represent a portion of a motor-driven system or a robot-controlled surgical instrument and/or a portion of the robotic system that may be used to operatively control a surgical instrument. For example, the drive system arrangements and end actuator arrangements disclosed in the present invention may be used with various robotic systems, instruments, components, and methods disclosed in US Patent Application Serial 13/118,241 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0298719, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[0139] Now referring to Figures 2-5, the cable 14 may comprise a pair of cable compartment segments 16 and 18, which may be interconnected by screws, snap-fit features, adhesives, etc. In the illustrated arrangement, the cable compartment segments 16, 18 cooperate to form a portion of the pistol grip 19 that can be grasped and manipulated by the clinician. As will be discussed in more detail below, the handle 14 operatively supports two rotary drive systems 20, 40 in it which are configured to generate and apply various control motions to the corresponding drive shaft portions of a specific end actuator coupled to the same. The first swivel drive system 20 can, for example, be used to apply "closing" motions to a corresponding closing drive shaft arrangement which is operatively supported on an end actuator and the second swivel drive system 40 can be used to apply "trigger" motions to a corresponding trigger shaft arrangement on the end actuator that is coupled thereto.

[0140] The first and second rotary drive systems 20, 40 are powered by a motor 80 through a unique and innovative "displaceable" transmission assembly 60 that essentially shifts power/motion between two power trains. The first rotary drive system 20 includes a first rotary drive shaft 22 that is pivotally supported in the housing 12 of the handle 14 and defines a first "FDA-FDA" drive shaft geometry. The first drive gear 24 is keyed over, or otherwise non-rotatically attached to the first rotary drive shaft 22 for rotation therewith about the first geometry axis of the FDA-FDA drive shaft. Similarly, the second rotary drive system 40 includes a second rotary drive shaft 42 which is pivotally supported in the housing 12 of the cable 14 and defines a second drive shaft geometry "SDA-SDA". In at least one arrangement, the second axis of the drive shaft SDA-SDA is offset from, and parallel to, or substantially parallel to the first axis of the drive axis FDA-FDA. As used in this context, the term "displacement" means that the geometry axes of the first and second drive axes are non-coaxial, for example. The second rotary drive shaft 42 has a second drive gear 44 keyed over, or otherwise non-rotatically attached to the second drive shaft 42 for rotation therewith about the axis of the second drive shaft, SDA-SDA . In addition, the second drive shaft 42 has an intermediate drive gear 46 with rotatably journal therein so that the intermediate drive gear 46 is freely rotatable about the second drive shaft rotatable 42 about the second axis of the SDA-SDA drive shaft.

[0141] Referring to Figures 2-5, in one form, the motor 80 includes a motor output shaft 81, which has a motor drive gear 82 non-rotatically attached thereto. Motor drive gear 82 is configured for "operable" engagement by interleaving with transmission assembly 60, as will be discussed in more detail below. In at least one form, the transmission assembly 60 includes a transmission carriage 62 which is supported for axial trajectory between the drive gear 82 and the gears 44 and 46 on the second rotating drive shaft 42. For example, the transmission carriage 62 can be sprung slidably on a support shaft 63 which is mounted within housing 12 on shaft mount 61 such that the line of action of the transmission car is perpendicular to the gear trains of the rotary drive systems . The shaft assembly 61 is configured to be rigidly supported within slots or other features within the housing 10. The transmission carriage 62 includes a carriage gear 64 which is pivotally supported on the support shaft 63 and is configured for in-mesh engagement. with gears 44 and 46 while in drive engagement with drive gear 82. In the arrangement shown in Figures 2-5, the transmission carriage 62 is operatively attached to a shifter or "means for displacement" 70 which is configured to axially displace the transmission carriage 62 between a "first drive position" and a "second drive position". In one form, for example, the means for displacement 70 includes a shifter solenoid 71 which is supported within the housing 12 of the cable 14. The shifter solenoid 71 may comprise a bistable solenoid, or, for example, may comprise a "actuated" solenoid. spring-loaded, double-position". The arrangement illustrated, for example, includes a spring 72 which forces the transmission carriage 62 in the distal direction "DD" to the first drive position, with the carriage gear 64 being in mesh with the intermediate drive gear 46 at the same time. at the same time, in meshed engagement with drive gear 82. When in this first drive position, activation of motor 80 will result in rotation of gears 82, 46 and 24 which ultimately result in rotation of first drive shaft 22. As will be discussed in this document, shifter solenoid 71 may be actuated by a trigger trigger 90 that is pivotally supported over housing 12 of cable 14, as shown in Figures 2 and 5. In the illustrated embodiment, trigger trigger 90 is pivotally supported on an axis of the trigger 92 mounted on the handle 14. The trigger 90 is normally forced into the non-actuated position by a trigger spring 94. See Fig. 3. Trigger trigger 90 is mounted for operable actuation of a trigger switch 96 that is operatively supported on a control circuit board assembly 100. In the illustrated arrangement, actuation of trigger trigger 90 results in triggering of the trigger. solenoid 71. As described in more detail below in connection with Figures 61, 63, 64, the cable processor 7024 provides the drive signal to the shifter solenoid 7032 (71). Referring now again to Figures 2-5, in this way, actuation of firing trigger 90 will result in shifter solenoid 71 pulling drive carriage 62 in the proximal direction "DP" to thereby move carriage gear 64 into engagement. Mesh with second drive gear 44. See Figure 7. The drive of motor 80, when carriage gear 64 is in meshed engagement with drive gear 82 and second drive gear 44, will result in rotation of the second drive shaft. drive 42 on the second geometry axis of the drive axis "SDA". As can also be seen in Figures 2-5, the shiftable transmission assembly 60 may also include an indicator system 74 that includes a pair of keys 75 and 76 that are operatively coupled to the control board 100, as well as an indicator light. 77. The switches 75, 76 are used to detect the position of the transmission carriage 62, which results in the indicator light 77 being activated by the control system, depending on the position of the transmission carriage 62. For example, the indicator light 77 may be energized when the transmission carriage 62 is in the first drive position. This provides the clinician with an indication that actuation of the motor 80 will result in the activation of the first actuation system 20.

[0142] Various surgical instruments described herein may also include a transmission assembly 60' that is substantially identical to the transmission assembly 60, but also include a locking means or assembly (generally designated as 65) for locking the first and second systems. actuators 20, 40 so as to prevent their inadvertent actuation when they are not intended to be actuated. For example, Figure 6A illustrates an alternate drive carriage 62' that includes a first drive lock 66 and a second drive lock 68. The first drive lock 66 comprises a first tooth or gear engagement member on the drive carriage. transmission 62' which is located in interleaving engagement with second drive gear 44 when carriage gear 64 is in drive engagement with idler gear 46 (i.e. when transmission assembly 60' is in first position of drive). See FIGURE 6B. Thus, when the transmission assembly 60' is in the first drive position, the first drive lock 66 is in mesh with the second drive gear 44 and prevents their relative rotation, while the first drive shaft 22 is rotated as described above. Similarly, when the transmission assembly 60' is in the second drive position (i.e., the carriage gear 64 is in meshed engagement with the second drive gear 44), the second drive latch 68 is in meshed engagement with the second drive gear 44. the intermediate drive gear 46. See FIGURE 6C. Thus, when the transmission assembly 60' is in the second drive position, the second drive lock 68 prevents the idler gear 46 from turning, which also prevents the first drive gear 24 from turning. As such, when the clinician operates the motor 80 to drive the first drive system 20, the second drive system 40 is locked in position. Similarly, when the clinician operates the second drive system 40, the first drive system 20 is locked in position.

[0143] The control system for the motor 80, as described hereafter in relation to Figures 61, 63 and 64, can be programmed such that it always stops in one orientation when a tooth of gears 42, 44 remains vertical or in another defined position, depending on the orientation of the other corresponding gear. This feature will serve to avoid any interference between the gear teeth during displacement. During travel, the locking members also shift and lock the position of the non-rotating gear train. When used in connection with an end actuator that includes a cartridge/anvil arrangement or other stapling configuration, another advantage gained by locking the non-rotating (i.e., non-powered) gear train is retention of the clamp/anvil in a stable position during shooting.

[0144] Motor 80 may be a brushed direct current drive motor having a maximum speed of approximately 25,000 rpm, for example. In other arrangements, the motor may include a brushless motor, a wireless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor, including motors that can be autoclavable. The motor 80 may be powered by a power source 84 which, in one form, may comprise a power source 86 which is detachably stored in the handle 14. As can also be seen in Figures 2-5, for example, the power supply 86 may be removably housed within the pistol grip portion 19 of the handle 14. To access the power supply 86, the clinician removes a removable cap 17 which is attached to the pistol grip portion 19 as per shown. Power supply 86 may operatively support a plurality of batteries (not shown) within it. Each of the batteries may comprise, for example, a lithium-ion ("LI") battery or other suitable battery. The power supply 86 is configured for operationally removable attachment to the control circuit board assembly 100, which is also operatively coupled to the motor 80 and mounted inside the cable 14. Multiple batteries can be connected in series and can be used as the power source for the surgical instrument. Furthermore, the power source 84 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable and, in at least one case, may include CR123 batteries, for example. Motor 80 may be driven by a "trigger-oscillator" 110 that is pivotally mounted to the pistol grip portion 19 of the handle 14. The oscillator trigger 110 is configured to actuate a first motor switch 112, which is operatively coupled to the control board 100. The first motor switch 112 may comprise a pressure switch which is actuated by articulating the rocker trigger 110 in contact therewith. Actuation of the first switch of motor 112 will result in the actuation of motor 80 so that the drive gear 82 rotates in a first rotary direction. A second motor switch 114 is also secured to circuit board 100 and mounted for selective contact by oscillator trigger 110. Actuation of second motor switch 114 will result in motor 80 being driven such that drive gear 82 is rotated in a second direction. For example, in use, a polarity of the voltage supplied by the power source 84 can operate the electric motor 80 in a clockwise direction, whereas the polarity of voltage applied to the electric motor by the battery can be reversed so as to operate the electric motor 80 in an anti-clockwise direction. As with the other forms described in the present invention, the cable 14 may also include a sensor that is configured to detect the directions in which the drive systems are being moved. A specific implementation of the motor 80 is described below in connection with Figures 61, 63, 64, where a brushless DC motor 7038 is described. The DC motor 7038 may be autoclavable.

[0145] Figures 8-12 illustrate another form of surgical instrument 10' that may be identical to the surgical instrument 10, except for the differences noted below. Those components of the surgical instrument 10' which are the same as the components in the surgical instrument 10 described above will be designated with the same element numbers. Those components of the surgical instrument 10' which may be similar in operation, but not identical to the corresponding components of the surgical instrument 10, will be designated with the same component numbers, together with a "'" or, in some cases, a """ . As can be seen in Figures 8, for example, the first axis of the drive axis "FDA" is offset from and parallel to, or substantially parallel to, the second axis of the drive axis "SDA". Referring primarily to Figure 9, for example, the transmission assembly 60 and, more specifically, the transmission carriage 62" is manually displaceable by a linkage assembly 120 which is operatively attached to the firing trigger 90'. As can be seen in that Figure, for example, the linkage assembly 120 includes a first transmission link 122 that is pivotally coupled to the trigger trigger 90' and extends axially to be pivotally coupled to a transmission hook 124. The transmission hook 124 is movably attached to the transmission carriage 62". Thus, the triggering of the trigger 90' results in the axial movement of the transmission carriage 62". It will therefore be understood that the linkage assembly 120 essentially performs drive movements similar to those performed by the shifter solenoid 71 which has been described above. As used in the context of this embodiment with respect to movement of the transmission carriage 62”, the term "manually shiftable" refers to the movement of the transmission carriage between the first and second drive positions without the use of electricity or other means of energy other than pressing the 90' trigger.

[0146] As can also be seen in Figures 8-12, the second drive gear 44' is spaced from the idler gear 46' on the second drive shaft 42' by a spacer 45. The second drive gear 44' is keyed on, or otherwise rotatably affixed to the second drive shaft 42', while the idler gear 46' is rotatably journalled on the second drive axis 42' for free rotation therewith. In one form, for example, a distal drive gear 130 is supported in meshed engagement with the intermediate drive gear 46'. Similarly, a proximal drive gear 136 is supported in engagement with second drive gear 44'. In this arrangement, however, the transmission carriage 62' also includes a centrally arranged transmission gear assembly 140 which is operatively attached to the transmission carriage 62' for axial trajectory therewith. Still referring to Figures 8-12, the transmission gear assembly 140 includes a centrally disposed displacer drive gear 142 that is in sliding mesh engagement with the motor drive gear 82. Thus, rotation of the motor drive gear 142 motor 82 results in the rotation of the displacer drive gear 142. In this way, a proximally extending, conical shaped drive gear 144 is coupled to the displacer drive gear 142 and is configured for selective meshed engagement with a proximal gear 146 that is secured to proximal drive gear 136. Similarly, a distally extending, conical-shaped drive gear 148 is configured for selective meshing engagement with a distal gear socket 150 secured to the distal drive gear. 130.

[0147] When the clinician wishes to actuate the first drive system 20, the clinician moves the trigger trigger 90' to axially move the drive gear assembly 140 to drive the conical-shaped drive gear distally extending 148 to the meshed hitch seated with the distal gear socket 150 which is attached to the distal drive gear 130. See Figure 8-10 When in this position, operation of motor 80 will result in rotation of motor drive gear 82, drive gear 142, distal drive gear 130, intermediate drive gear 46', the first drive gear 24 and the first drive shaft 22. When the clinician wishes to drive the second drive system 40, the clinician moves the trigger trigger 90' to the position shown in Figures 11 and 12 to thereby bring the conically shaped drive gear proximally extending 144 into meshing engagement with seated with proximal mating socket 146 which is secured to proximal drive gear 136. When in this position, operation of motor 80 will result in rotation of drive gear 82, displacer drive gear 142, proximal drive gear 136, on the second drive gear 44' and on the second drive shaft 42'. As can also be seen in Figures 8-12, sensors 152 and 154 can be employed to detect the position of transmission carriage 62”, as will be discussed in more detail below. For example, sensors 152 and 154 can be implemented using Hall effect sensors 7028 described below in relation to Figures 61, 63, 64.

[0148] Figures 13-16 illustrate another form of motor-driven surgical instrument 310 that may be identical to surgical instrument 10, except for the differences noted below. Those components of the surgical instrument 310 which are the same as the components in the surgical instrument 10 described above will be designated with the same element numbers. In this arrangement, the first and second drive systems 20, 40 are powered by a motor 80 through a unique and innovative "displaceable" transmission assembly 360. The first drive system 20 includes a first drive shaft 22 which has a first drive pulley 324 keyed thereto or otherwise non-rotatically affixed thereto. Similarly, the second drive system 40 includes a second drive shaft 42 that has a second drive pulley 344 keyed thereto, or otherwise non-rotatically affixed thereto. As can be seen in Figures 14, for example, the first axis of the drive axis "FDA" is offset from and parallel to, or substantially parallel to, the second axis of the drive axis "SDA".

[0149] Still referring to Figures 13-16, in one form, the motor 80 includes a first motor pulley 382, which is non-rotatically attached to the motor shaft 80. The first motor pulley 382 drives the first drive belt 385 which is received on the first drive pulley 324. In addition, a second motor pulley 384 is non-rotatically mounted to the motor shaft and operatively supports a second drive belt 387 thereon. The second drive belt 387 is also received on the second drive pulley 344 on the second drive shaft 42. The first and second drive belts 385, 387 may comprise V-belts, for example.

[0150] The instrument 310 also includes a transmission assembly 360 that includes a transmission carriage 362 that is supported for axial path within the instrument housing. Drive carriage 362 operatively interacts with a pulley carriage 374 which is supported to move laterally in response to contact with drive carriage 362 as drive carriage 362 is moved axially by shifter solenoid 71. 374 includes a first pulley pulley 375 and a second pulley pulley 376 mounted thereto. In the illustrated arrangement, spring 72 forces drive carriage 362 in the distal direction "DD" to a first drive position, with drive carriage 362 causing pulley carriage 374 to move in a first lateral direction" FLD ", which causes the first pulley pulley 375 to remove slack from the first drive belt 385. When in this position, the second pulley pulley 376 is located out of engagement with the second drive belt 387. Thus, the operation of the motor 80 will result in the rotation of the first drive shaft 22. Although the second motor pulley 384 is also rotated when the motor 80 is activated, slack in the second drive belt 387 prevents the rotary motion from being transferred to the second drive pulley. drive 344. In this way, no rotary motion is transferred to the second drive system 40. As discussed above, shifter solenoid 71 can be driven by trigger trigger 90. However, in In alternative embodiments, the shifter solenoid 71 may also be replaced by a manually operable linkage assembly of the type described above, for example. In the illustrated arrangement, actuation of firing trigger 90 will result in shifter solenoid 71 pulling drive carriage 362 in the proximal "DP" direction to thereby laterally shift pulley carriage 374 in a second lateral direction "SLD" to place the second pulley 376 in contact with the second drive belt 387 to remove slack therefrom. This lateral movement of the pulley carriage 374 also moves the first pulley 375 out of engagement with the first drive belt 385 to allow the first drive belt 385 to slacken. Thus, when in such a second driving position, driving the motor 80 results in driving the second drive system 40. Slack in the first drive belt 385 prevents the rotary motion from being transferred to the first drive system 20.

[0151] The 360 transmission suite can provide several distinct advantages. For example, the use of V-belts eliminates meshed gears or gear alignments with a clutch. Additionally, such a transmission arrangement can be activated or deactivated under load. In addition, the 360 transmission assembly requires little displacement to disengage and engage.

[0152] Figures 17-21 illustrate another form of motor-driven surgical instrument 410 that may be identical to surgical instrument 10, except for the differences noted below. Those components of the surgical instrument 410 that are the same as the components of the surgical instrument 10 described above will be designated with the same element numbers. In this arrangement, the first and second drive systems 20, 40 are powered by a motor 480 through a unique and innovative "displaceable" transmission assembly 460. The first drive system 20 includes a first drive shaft 22 having a first drive pulley 424 keyed thereto or otherwise non-rotatically affixed thereto. Similarly, the second drive system 40 includes a second drive shaft 42 which has a second drive pulley 444 keyed thereto, or otherwise non-rotatically attached thereto. As can be seen in Figure 18, for example, the first axis of the drive axis "FDA" is offset from and parallel to, or substantially parallel to, the second axis of the drive axis "SDA".

[0153] Now referring to Figure 19, in one form, the motor 480 includes a splined drive shaft 481, which is adapted to slidably engage a drive shaft assembly 490, which is configured to interact with a drive car. transmission 462 such that axial movement of transmission carriage 462 results in axial movement of drive shaft assembly 490 on splined drive shaft 481. As can be seen in Figure 19, drive shaft assembly 490 has a splined hole. 491 therein to slidably and operatively receive the splined drive shaft 481 therein. In addition, a distal engagement collar 492 is formed at a distal end of the drive shaft assembly 490. The distal engagement collar 492 is configured with an annular groove 493 which is configured to receive two opposing hook rods 465 therein. which are attached to a hook portion 464 of the drive carriage 462. Such arrangement serves to couple the drive carriage 462 to the drive shaft assembly 490, allowing the drive shaft assembly 490 to rotate relative to the drive carriage 462 .

[0154] Still referring to Figure 19, a first motor pulley 482 is configured for selective drive engagement with the drive shaft assembly 490. As can be seen in Figure 19, for example, the drive shaft assembly 490 has a rolling collar 494 formed at the proximal end thereof, which is sized to be slidably and rotatably received within hole 483 in first motor pulley 482. In addition, first motor pulley 482 also includes a cavity for star-shaped proximal drive 488, which is adapted for meshing engagement of a complementary shaped drive portion 495 formed on the drive shaft assembly 490. The first motor pulley 482 drives the first drive belt 485 which is also received in the drive shaft 490. first drive pulley 424. Surgical instrument 410 also includes a second motor pulley 484 that has a star-shaped hole 489 that is configured to engagement of drive portion 495 of driveshaft assembly 490 therein. A second motor pulley 484 operatively supports a second drive belt 487 thereon which is also received on the second drive pulley 444.

[0155] As noted above, instrument 410 also includes a transmission assembly 460, which includes a transmission carriage 462 that is supported for axial path within the instrument housing. Drive carriage 462 operatively interacts with driveshaft assembly 490 to also move driveshaft assembly 490 axially while driveshaft assembly 490 remains engaged with motor shaft 481. Figure 20 illustrates shifter solenoid. 71 in the non-actuated position. As can be seen in this Figure, drive carriage 462 has moved drive shaft assembly 490 to the most proximal position, which may also be called the "first drive position" with drive portion 495 in drive engagement. with the star-shaped hole 488 in the first motor pulley 482. Thus, rotation of the motor shaft 481 will result in the rotation of the drive shaft assembly 490 and the first motor pulley 482. The rotation of the first motor pulley 482 results in the rotation of the first drive belt 485 which ultimately results in the rotation of the first drive shaft 22. When the drive shaft assembly 490 is in the first drive position, the drive shaft assembly 490 rotates freely with respect to to the second motor pulley 484. Thus, when the first drive system 20 is driven, the second drive system 40 remains undriven. When shift solenoid 71 is driven to the position shown in Figure 21 (by actuation of trigger trigger 90), drive carriage 462 moves drive shaft assembly 490 to its most distal position on motor shaft 481, which can also be called "second drive position". As can be seen in Figure 21, when the drive shaft assembly 490 is in the second drive position, the drive portion 495 thereof is moved into mesh engagement with the star-shaped hole 489 in the second motor pulley 484. Thus, rotation of motor shaft 481 will result in rotation of second motor pulley 484. Rotation of second motor pulley 484 will result in rotation of second drive belt 487, which results in rotation of second drive shaft 42. When in that second drive position, the drive shaft assembly 490 rotates freely within the first motor pulley 482. In this way, when the second drive system 40 is driven, the first drive system 20 is in a non-driven state. .

[0156] Figures 22-27 illustrate another engine, transmission assembly and first and second drive systems that can be used with various surgical instruments described herein. The illustrated arrangement includes a motor 580 having a motor shaft 581. See Figures 23 and 24. Motor drive gear 582 or "sun gear" 582 is non-rotatically attached to motor shaft 581 for rotation therewith. The arrangement further includes a planetary gear set 570, which includes three planetary gears 572, which are pivotally supported between a distal carrier bracket 573 and proximal carrier bracket 574. The proximal carrier bracket 574 is supported on a central portion of the sun gear 582, so that sun gear 582 can rotate with respect to proximal carrier bracket 574. Distal carrier bracket 573 is affixed to a second drive shaft 542 of a second drive system 40 such that rotation of distal carrier bracket 573 will result in rotation of the second drive shaft 542 of the second drive system 40. The three planetary gears 572 are supported in meshed engagement with a ring gear set 575. More specifically, the planetary gears 572 are in meshed engagement with a ring gear. internal 576 on ring gear set 575. The gear set ring gear 575 further includes an outer ring gear 577 which is in meshed engagement with a first drive gear 524 which is affixed to a first drive shaft 522 of the first drive system 20. As can be seen in Figure 24, for example , the first geometry axis of the drive axis "FDA" is offset from and parallel to, or substantially parallel to, the second axis of the drive axis "SDA".

[0157] As can be seen in Figure 23, the arrangement further includes a solenoid 71 that can be operated by the trigger trigger in the various ways described herein. In this arrangement, the drive assembly 560 is secured to the shaft 73 of the solenoid 71. Figure 24 illustrates the drive assembly 560 in the first actuation position. In one form, the transmission assembly 560 includes a latch assembly, generally designated as 590, which comprises a first proximal latch pin portion or portion 592 and a second, distal latch pin portion or portion 594 over the latch set. transmission 560. As can be seen in this Figure, the transmission assembly 560 is positioned so that the proximal locking pin portion 592 is in engagement with the proximal carrier bracket 574. When in this first driving position, the locking pin portion 574 proximal lock 592 prevents planetary gear set 570 from rotating as a unit with sun gear 582. However, rotation of sun gear 582 results in rotation of planetary gears 572. Rotation of planetary gears 572 results in rotation of gear set 575. Rotation of ring gear set 575 results in rotation of first drive gear 524 and first drive shaft 5 22. Because the proximal carrier bracket 574 is prevented from rotating, the distal carrier bracket 573 is also prevented from rotating. Thus, the second drive shaft 544 is also prevented from rotating while the first drive shaft 522 is rotated. A spring (not shown) can be used to force solenoid 71 (and transmission assembly 560 attached thereto) into this "first actuated position". When the clinician wishes to activate the second actuation system 40, the solenoid 71 can be activated using the trigger trigger, as described above, to move the solenoid shaft 73 to the position shown in Figure 25. 560 is in this "second drive position", the distal lock pin portion 594 retentively engages the ring gear assembly 575 to prevent rotation thereof. Thus, when sun gear 582 is rotated, the planetary gear carrier (i.e., distal carrier bracket 573 and proximal carrier bracket 574) will also rotate. Planet gears 572 will rotate within the fixed inner ring gear 576. Such rotational motion will be transferred to the second drive shaft 542, while the first drive shaft 522 remains undriven.

[0158] Figure 28 illustrates another form of motor-driven surgical instrument 610 that may be identical to surgical instrument 10, except for the differences noted below. Those components of the surgical instrument 610 that are the same as the components of the surgical instrument 10 described above will be designated with the same element numbers. As can be seen in Figure 28, for example, the first axis of the drive axis "FDA" is offset from and parallel to, or substantially parallel to, the second axis of the drive axis "SDA". This arrangement comprises a motor 680 having dual independently driveable motor shafts 681, 683. The motor 680 may be controlled by a trigger trigger arrangement of the various types described herein, such that actuation of the trigger trigger, one way causes the motor 680 to rotate the first axis of the motor 681 and actuation of the trigger trigger the other way causes the motor 680 to rotate the second axis of the motor 683. In this arrangement, a first gear of the motor 682 is is mounted on the first motor shaft 681 and is supported in engagement with a pulley gear 646. The pulley gear 646 is operatively supported in engagement with a first drive gear 624 which is mounted with a first drive shaft 622 of a first drive system 620. Thus, driving the first motor shaft 681 will result in driving the first drive system 620. Similarly, a second motor gear 684 is mounted on the second motor shaft 683 and is supported in engagement with a second drive gear 644 which is mounted on a second drive shaft 642 of a second drive system 640. As such, the motor drive second motor shaft 683 will result in the second drive system 640 being driven.

[0159] Figure 29 illustrates another form of motor-driven surgical instrument 710 that may be identical to surgical instrument 10, except for the differences noted below. Those components of the surgical instrument 710 which are the same as the components in the surgical instrument 10 described above will be designated with the same element numbers. As can be seen in Figure 29, for example, the first axis of the drive axis "FDA" is offset from and parallel to, or substantially parallel to, the second axis of the drive axis "SDA". In this arrangement, the first and second drive systems 720, 740 are powered by a motor 780 through a unique and innovative "displaceable" transmission assembly 760. The first drive system 720 includes a first drive shaft 722 that has a first drive gear 724 keyed thereto or otherwise non-rotatically affixed thereto. Similarly, the second drive system 740 includes a second drive shaft 742 that has a second drive gear 744 keyed thereto, or otherwise non-rotatically affixed thereto. The 780 motor includes a motor gear 782 that is non-rotatically attached to the shaft 781 of the 780 motor.

[0160] In the illustrated arrangement, a second motor 750 is used to drive the transmission assembly 760, as will be discussed in more detail below. The second motor 750 may be controlled, for example, by the various trigger and switch arrangements disclosed herein. The second motor 750 can be controlled in a manner similar to the way the motor 7038 is controlled as described below with respect to Figures 61, 63, 64. As can be seen in Figure 29, a first transfer pulley 753 is keyed. on, or otherwise non-rotatically affixed to the motor shaft 752. A first pivot shaft 754 is pivotally supported within the housing 12 of the handle 14. The first pivot shaft defines a pivot shaft "PA". A second transfer pulley 755 is non-rotarily mounted on the first pivot shaft 754 and a transfer belt 756 is mounted on the first and second transfer pulleys 753, 755. transfer 762 which is attached to the first pivot shaft 754. Furthermore, an intermediate shaft 763 is attached to the transfer link 762 which operatively supports a pulley gear 764 thereon. Displaceable transmission assembly 760 is movable between a first actuation position and a second actuation position. To move the shiftable transmission assembly 760 to the first drive position, the clinician drives the second motor 750 to rotate the pivot shaft 763 and sheave gear 764 about the pivot shaft PA so that it is in meshed engagement. with the motor gear 782 and the first drive gear 724. When in this position, the drive of the motor 780 will then result in the drive of the first drive system 720. When the clinician wishes to drive the second drive system 740, the second drive 750 is driven to rotate pulley gear 764 on pivot shaft for PA engagement gear with motor gear 782 and second drive gear 744. When in this position, drive motor 780 results in the second drive system being driven. 740. One benefit that can be gained from this arrangement is that precise gear guidance is not required. As the 764 pulley gear swings into position, it can swivel and automatically find a mating tooth.

[0161] Figures 30-32 illustrate a unique and innovative engine unit 800 that can be mounted within a compartment of the types described herein. The motor unit 800 may include a separate housing structure 801 that operatively supports a first motor 802, with a first motor shaft 803 defining a first motor drive system 804. The motor unit 800 may include a second motor 805 , with a second motor axis 806 defining a second drive system 807. As can be seen in Figure 8, for example, the first axis of the drive axis "FDA" is offset from, and parallel to, or is substantially parallel with, the second geometry axis of the drive axis "SDA". Unit 800 may further include a control circuit board 808 that contacts 808A that operatively interfaces with corresponding contacts on the circuit board mounted inside the instrument compartment or otherwise supported therein and communicating with the control system. instrument control. The housing may further include electrical contacts 808B that are configured to interface operationally with corresponding electrical contacts on an end actuator tool that is coupled thereto.

[0162] As illustrated in Figure 1, the modular surgical system 2 can include a variety of different arrangements of surgical end actuators 1000, 2000 and 3000 that can be used in connection with the various surgical instruments described herein. As will be discussed in more detail below, each of the end actuators 1000, 2000, 3000 includes separate, dual "first and second end actuator actuation systems" which are adapted to operatively interface with the first and second actuation systems. in the surgical instrument to receive control movements of the same. End actuator drive systems are each configured to linearly move the corresponding end actuator drive components from the first linear position or start positions to the second linear position or end positions in response to corresponding rotary motions applied to the end actuator systems. actuation of the end actuator by the surgical instrument to which the end actuator is operatively attached. End actuator drive components apply linear drive motions to various end actuator components located in the tool head portion of the end actuator in order to perform various surgical procedures. As will be discussed in more detail below, end actuators employ unique components and systems to assist the clinician in coupling the first and second drive shafts of the surgical instrument with the corresponding drive shafts on the end actuator. Because the four drive shafts are coupled together simultaneously, essentially, various coupling arrangements and control techniques can be used to ensure that the shafts are in the correct positions, or "nearly correct positions", which will facilitate such simultaneous coupling of the drive systems. drive.

[0163] Now with reference to Figure 33, a form of mechanical coupling system 50 can be used to facilitate the simultaneous removable and operable coupling of the two drive systems on the surgical instrument to the corresponding "driven" shafts on the end actuators. Coupling system 50 may comprise male couplers that can be attached to drive shafts on the surgical instrument and corresponding female socket couplers that are attached to drive shafts on the surgical end actuator. For example, Figure 9 illustrates male couplers 51 secured to the first and second drive shafts 22, 42 by pressure screws 52. Again with reference to Figure 33, each of the male couplers 51 is configured to be drive-received within. of the corresponding female socket couplers 57 which may also be attached to the driven shafts within the end actuator. In one form, each male coupler 51 includes at least three drive ribs 53 that are equally spaced around a central portion 54 of the male coupler 51. In the illustrated embodiment, for example, five drive ribs 53 are equally spaced around the male coupler 51. central portion 54. Each drive rib 53 has a pointed distal end 55. Each drive rib 53 may be formed with somewhat rounded edges 56 to facilitate easy insertion into the corresponding socket grooves 58 within the female socket coupler 57. Each socket groove 58 has a tapered proximal entry portion 59 to facilitate insertion of a corresponding drive rib 53 therein. The pointed distal end 55 of each drive rib 53 in conjunction with the tapered inlet 59 of each socket groove 58 will accommodate some misalignment between the male coupler 51 and its corresponding female socket coupler 57 during the mating process. In addition, the rounded edges 57 on the pointed distal end 55 also aid in the sliding insertion of the male coupler 51 into the corresponding female socket coupler 58.

[0164] In one form, at least one of the male couplers 51 is movably attached to its corresponding first or second drive axis of the surgical instrument or its corresponding first and second drive axis of the surgical end actuator. More specifically, male coupler 51 may be fixed for radial, or angular, path on the shaft for a "first predetermined amount of radial paths" on the shaft. This can be achieved, for example, by key and keyway mechanisms that are sized relative to each other to facilitate a radial, or angular, amount of travel of male coupler 51 on the shaft. In other words, for example, the shaft may have a key formed therein or otherwise mounted thereon which is smaller than a corresponding keyway formed in the male coupler 51 so that the key can move within the keyway and establish a first predetermined number of radial paths. This first predetermined amount of radial path is preferably sufficient enough to drive the coupler backwards or forwards. For a male coupler 51 having five ribs 53, for example, the first predetermined beech of radial paths may be, for example, 5-37 degrees. Some embodiments may exist where the first predetermined range of radial trajectory may be less than 5° and preferably not greater than 4°, for example. This range of radial, or angular, trajectory may be sufficient if, for example, the corresponding female socket coupler 57 was rigidly affixed to its corresponding drive shaft and was otherwise incapable of any radial trajectory. However, if both male and female couplers have the ability to adjust radially, or angularly, such radial, or angular, path range may be reduced by 50% to provide each coupler (male coupler and corresponding female socket coupler) with a trajectory range of about 3-16 degrees. The amount of radial or angular path a female socket coupler 57 can move on its corresponding axis may be referred to here as a "second predetermined amount of radial path". The female socket couplers 57 may also be secured to their respective drive shafts with a key and keyway mechanism, as described above, which imparts the second predetermined desired amount of radial trajectory. Some embodiments may exist where the second predetermined radial path range may be less than 5° and preferably not greater than 4°, for example.

[0165] Various combinations and mounting arrangements of male couplers and female socket couplers are contemplated. For example, one or both of the male couplers can be movably mounted with their respective surgical instrument drive shafts (or surgical end actuator drive shafts) in the various ways described herein. Likewise, one or both of the female socket couplers can be movably mounted on their respective driven shafts on the end actuator (or surgical instrument driven shafts) in the various ways described herein. For example, a male coupler on one of the first and second drive shafts can be movably mounted thereon. The other male coupler which is fixed to the other drive shaft can be non-movably mounted thereto. The female socket coupler on the driven shaft which corresponds to the movably mounted male coupler may be non-movably attached to its driven shaft and the female socket coupler mounted on the other driven shaft which corresponds to the non movably mounted coupler may be movably mounted to its drive shaft. Thus, one of a male coupler and a female coupler socket of a "coupler pair" is movable. The term "coupler pair" refers to the male coupler and corresponding female socket coupler which is configured to be coupled together to operatively couple a surgical instrument drive shaft to its corresponding end actuator drive shaft. In other arrangements, both the female coupler socket and the male coupler of a pair of couplers may both be movably coupled to their respective axes.

[0166] Such coupler arrangements serve to provide a small amount of angular clearance, for example, between coupler components, so that the components can rotate slightly for sufficient alignment to allow simultaneous alignment of the coupler components fixed to the two drive trains. separate rotary drive. In addition, there may be a sufficient amount of setback or clearance provided in the drive trains to accommodate the coupling process. This setback or clearance can be provided through the formation of keys/keyway in the gears, couplers and/or coupling shafts to facilitate this slight rotation of the components. In addition, a switching arrangement can be used in connection with the various shiftable transmission assemblies which can activate the motor to cause slight rotation of the drive shafts for coupling purposes.

[0167] These and other control techniques can be used to ensure that drive shafts on surgical instruments are positioned in desired positions, which facilitate their coupling with corresponding drive shafts on end actuators. The unique and innovative mechanical coupling system 50 serves to provide some additional flexibility during the coupling process to allow the drive shafts to be coupled together in the event of any misalignment between the respective shafts. It will be understood that while the various embodiments described herein illustrate male couplers 51 attached to drive shafts within the surgical instrument and female socket couplers 58 attached to drive shafts of the end actuator, male couplers 51 could be attached to shafts end actuator drive shafts and 58 female socket couplers can be attached to the instrument drive shafts.

[0168] Figures 34-37 depict a surgical end actuator 1000 comprising a surgical instrument for cutting and fixing of a type that is commonly termed an "open linear" stapler. Various forms of such open linear stapling devices are disclosed in, for example, US Patent No. 5,415,334 entitled SURGICAL STAPLER AND STAPLE CARTRIDGE and US Patent No. 8,561,870 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT, complete descriptions of each being incorporated herein by reference. End actuator 1000 comprises an end actuator housing 1010 which may be manufactured from housing segments 1012, 1014 which are removably coupled together by screws, pins, snap-fit features, etc. Protruding from the end actuator housing 1010 are a lower jaw 1020 and an upper jaw 1040, which can together form the tool head of the end actuator 1004. The lower jaw 1020 comprises a lower jaw structure 1022 that is configured to operatively support a 1060 surgical staple cartridge therein. Such surgical staple cartridges are well known in the art and will not be described in great detail in this document. Briefly, the surgical staple cartridge 1060 may comprise a cartridge body 1062 that has rows of staple pockets 1066 formed therein on each side of an elongated slot 1068, which is centrally disposed within the cartridge body 1062. The slot 1068 is configured to accommodate the longitudinal path of a cutting member therethrough 1090 as will be discussed in more detail below. A surgical staple or staples (not shown) are supported in staple pockets 1066 on staple drive members (not shown) that are configured to move upwardly within their respective pocket 1066 during a firing process. The staple cartridge 1060 can be configured to be removed from the lower jaw structure 1022 and replaced with another unused cartridge making the end actuator 1000 reusable. However, the 1000 End Actuator can also be disposable after a single use.

[0169] Referring to Figure 36, the lower jaw structure 1022 may be formed from metallic material and has a U-shaped distal portion 1024 that is configured to seat the surgical staple cartridge 1060 therein. The side walls 1026 of the U-shaped distal portion 1024 may have a distal end 1028 that is configured to releasably or retainably engage a portion of the surgical cartridge 1060. The staple cartridge body 1062 may also have engagement features. 1064 which are adapted to releasably engage portions of the vertical wall 1030 of the lower jaw structure 1022. End actuator 1000 further comprises an upper jaw 1040 which includes an anvil portion 1042. Anvil portion 1042 may include a lower side ( not shown) which has a plurality of staple forming pockets therein. Upper jaw 1040 further includes a proximal body portion 1044 which has a distal pivot pin 1046 extending therethrough. The ends of the distal swivel pin 1046 projecting laterally from the proximal end of the proximal body portion 1044 are rotatably received within holes of the swivel pin 1032 in the lower jaw 1020. The swivel pin 1046 defines an AA-AA attachment axis. upon which the proximal end of the upper jaw 1040 pivots relative to the lower jaw 1020 such that the anvil portion 1042 is movable between a spaced open position of the staple cartridge 1060 mounted within the lower jaw 1020 and an adjacent closed position to the staple cartridge 1060 and/or fabric that is located therebetween. End actuator 1000 may further include a fulcrum pin 1050 which is received within cradles 1034 formed in vertical walls 1030 of lower jaw 1020 and is mounted within holes 1016 in housing segments 1012, 1014. The fulcrum pin 1050 may serve as an axis or fulcrum surface upon which the anvil portion 1042 pivots.

[0170] The movement of the anvil portion 1042 between the open and closed positions is controlled by a first end actuator drive system also called here the end actuator closing system 1070. In one form, for example, the end actuator End actuator closure system 1070 includes a closure shuttle 1072 that extends around the proximal body portion 1024 of lower jaw 1020. Closing shuttle 1072 may also be called a "first end actuator". Closing shuttle 1072 may include a U-shaped portion that includes distal vertical walls 1074 and proximal vertical walls 1076. Each distal vertical wall 1074 includes an arcuate cam slot 1078 that is adapted to receive a corresponding portion of a locking pin. cam 1048 which is attached to upper jaw 1040. Thus, axial or linear movement of closing shuttle 1072 with respect to lower jaw 1020 will cause upper jaw 1040 to rotate about fulcrum pin 1050 and about the attachment axis AA-AA due to the interaction of cam pin 1048 within cam slots 1078.

[0171] In various forms, the closure system 1070 includes a swivel end actuator closure shaft 1080, which is threaded and includes a distal end portion 1082 that is rotatably supported within the end actuator housing 1010. The End actuator closing axis 1080 defines a geometry axis of the CSA-CSA closing axis. See Figure 37. A female socket coupler 57 is attached to the proximal end of lock shaft 1080 to facilitate coupling of lock shaft 1080 with a male coupler 51 attached to a first drive shaft in a surgical instrument. The lock system 1070 further includes a lock nut 1084 which is threadedly received on the lock shaft 1080. The lock nut 1084 is configured to be seated within the mounting slots 1077 in the vertical walls 1076 of the lock shuttle. 1072. Thus, rotation of the lock shaft 1080 in a first direction will cause the lock nut 1084 to drive the lock shuttle 1072 in the distal direction "DD". Movement of the closing shuttle 1072 in the distal "DD" direction results in the pivoting trajectory of the upper jaw 1040 from an open position to a closed position. Similarly, movement of the closing shuttle 1084 in the proximal "DP" direction will result in the movement of the upper jaw 1040 from a posterior closed position to an open position.

[0172] The end actuator 1000 further includes a second end actuator drive system, also referred to herein as a trigger system 1100 to drive a fabric cutting member 1090 and triangular body slider assembly 1092 between home positions. and final. When the triangle body slider assembly 1092 is driven distally through the surgical staple cartridge 1060, the triangle body slider assembly 1092 operatively interacts with drivers within the cartridge 1060 that have the surgical staples abutted thereon. As the triangular body slider assembly 1092 is actuated distally, the actuators are actuated upwardly within the respective pockets to drive the clips supported therein to form engagement with the underside of the anvil portion 1042 of the gripper. 1040. In one form, the trigger system 1100 further includes a threaded rotary trigger shaft 1102 that is rotatably supported in the end actuator housing 1010. The trigger shaft 1102 defines an FSA-FSA trigger shaft geometry that is parallel, or substantially parallel, to the geometric axis of the closing axis CSA-CSA. See, for example, Figure 37. The trigger shaft 1102 includes a distal end portion 1104 that is pivotally supported on a mounting unit 1106, which is mounted within the end actuator housing 1010. A female socket coupler 57 is attached to the proximal end of the trigger shaft 1102 to facilitate coupling of the trigger shaft 1102 with a male lock coupler 51 that is attached to a second drive shaft on a surgical instrument. The trigger system 1100 further includes a trigger nut 1110 which is threadedly received on the trigger shaft 1102. Thus, rotation of the trigger shaft 1102 results in the axial trajectory of the trigger nut 1110 within the trigger actuator housing. end 1010. In one form, the fabric cutting member 1090 and the triangular body slider assembly 1092 are coupled to the trigger nut 1110 by a trigger bar or trigger bars 1112. The trigger bar or bars may also be here called a "second end actuator drive" which is moved linearly or axially in response to actuation of the trigger system. Thus, rotation of the trigger shaft 1102 in a first direction will drive the trigger nut 1110, triggering the bar(s) 1112, the fabric cutting member 1090 and the triangular body slider assembly 1092 in the direction "DD" from, for example, a starting position (Figure 35) to an ending position where the tissue cutting member 1090 and the triangular body slider assembly 1092 have been driven to the distal end of the cartridge surgical clips 1060. Rotation of trigger shaft 1102 in an opposite direction will drive trigger nut 1110, triggering bar(s) 1112, tissue cutting member 1090 and triangle body slider assembly 1092 in the proximal direction "DP" from their respective end positions posterior to their respective starting positions. In some embodiments, the triangular body slider assembly may remain at the distal end of the surgical staple cartridge and not return with the tissue cutting member 1090 to the starting position. In still other embodiments, the tissue cutting member and triangular body slider assembly may remain at the distal end of the staple cartridge member.

[0173] The 1000 end actuator may also be equipped with various sensors that are coupled to an end actuator contact plate 1120 mounted inside the end actuator housing 1010. Contact plate 1120 may be positioned with the housing of the end actuator 1020 so that when the end actuator 1000 is operatively coupled to the surgical instrument, the end actuator contact plate 1120 is electrically coupled to a surgical instrument contact plate 30 mounted in the surgical instrument housing 12. See, for example, Figure 1. Again with reference to Figure 34, a closing sensor 1122 can be mounted inside the end actuator housing 1010 and electrically coupled to the end actuator contact plate 1120 so that when the end actuator 1000 is operatively coupled to the surgical instrument, the closure sensor 1122 is in communication with the surgical instrument control system. The lock sensor 1122 may comprise a Hall effect sensor 7028 as shown hereafter, for example with reference to Figures 61, 63 which is configured to detect the position of a keying pin 1086 in the lock nut 1084. In addition In addition, a trigger sensor 1124 may also be mounted within the housing of the end actuator 1010 to detect the presence of a trigger bar 1112. The trigger sensor 1112 may comprise a Hall Effect sensor 7028 as shown hereafter. , for example, with reference to Figures 61, 63 and be electrically coupled to the end actuator contact plate 1120 for final communication with the surgical instrument control system such as the cable processor 7024 as will be discussed in more detail below, with respect to Figures 61, 63, 64.

[0174] The use of end actuator 1000 will now be explained in connection with surgical instrument 10. It will be appreciated, however, that end actuator 1000 may be operatively coupled to various other surgical instrument arrangements disclosed herein. Prior to use, the lock shaft 1080 and the trigger shaft 1102 are "synchronized" or positioned in their respective start positions to facilitate attachment to the first and second drive shafts 22, 42, respectively. To couple the end actuator 1000 to the surgical instrument 10, for example, the clinician moves the end actuator 1000 to a position where the axis of the closing axis CA-CA is in axial alignment with the first axis of the axis of closure. FDA-FDA drive and where the geometry axis of the FSA-FSA trigger axis is in axial alignment with the second axis of the SDA-SDA drive axis. The female socket coupler 57 on the closing shaft 1080 is inserted into operational engagement with the male coupler 51 on the first drive shaft 22. Likewise, the female socket coupler 57 on the triggering shaft 1102 is inserted into operational engagement with the male coupler 51 over the second drive shaft 42. Thus, when in that position, the lock shaft 1080 is operatively coupled to the first drive shaft 22 and the trigger shaft 1102 is operatively coupled to the second drive shaft 42. The plate actuator contact plate 1120 is operationally coupled to the surgical instrument contact plate 30 so that sensors 1122, 1124 (and any other sensors within the end actuator 1000) are in operable communication with the control system of the surgical instrument. To maintain the end actuator 1000 in operational engagement with the surgical instrument 10, the end actuator 1000 includes a retaining latch 1130 that is secured to the end actuator housing 1010 and configured to releasably engage a portion of the instrument housing 12 The retainer latch 1130 may include a retainer pin 1132 that can releasably engage a retainer cavity 15 formed in the housing 12. See Figure 1.

[0175] When coupled together, the lock sensor 1122 detects the position of the lock nut 1084 and the trigger sensor 1124 detects the position of the trigger bar 1112. This information is communicated to the surgical instrument control system. In addition, the physician can confirm that the shiftable transmission assembly (or transmission carriage 62 thereof) is in its first actuation position. This can be confirmed by activating the indicator light 77 over the compartment 12 as discussed above. If the displaceable transmission assembly 60 is not in its first actuation position, the clinician may actuate the firing trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to the first actuation position, so that the actuation of the oscillating trigger 110 to actuate the motor 80 will result in the actuation of the first drive system 20. Assuming that the closing system 1070 and the triggering system 1100 are each in their respective starting positions and the end actuator 1000 has a staple cartridge not 1060 properly installed therein, the clinician can then position the jaws 1020, 1040 in relation to the target tissue to be cut and stapled. The clinician may close the upper jaw 1040 by actuating the oscillating trigger 110 to drive the motor 80 and rotate the first drive shaft 22. Once the target tissue has been clamped between the upper jaw 1040 and the surgical staple cartridge 1060 on the lower jaw 1020, the clinician can then pull trigger trigger 92 to move transmission carriage 62 to its second drive position so that driving motor 80 will result in rotation of second drive shaft 42. Once Once the transmission carriage 62 is moved to the second actuation position, the clinician may once again actuate the oscillating trigger 110 to actuate the second actuation system 40 and the trigger system 1100 on the end actuator 1000 to actuate the tissue cutting member 1090 and triangular body slider assembly 1092 distally through the surgical staple cartridge 1060. As the tissue cutting member 1090 and triangular body sliders 1092 are distally driven, the target tissue stapled between the jaws 1020, 1040 is cut and stapled. Once the tissue cutting member 1090 and the triangular body slider assembly 1092 have been driven to their most distal positions on the surgical staple cartridge 1060, the clinician can actuate the oscillating trigger 110 to reverse the motor rotation and return the firing system 1100 to its starting position.

[0176] When employing the end actuator 1000 and the other end actuator and the surgical instruments disclosed herein containing similar claw arrangements it can be challenging to properly clean the anvil pockets on the underside of the anvil. Additionally, anvil pockets can chafe, scive, or simply wear out over time making them unsuitable for reuse. Also, depending on the application, loading and removing the surgical staple cartridge can be difficult. Figures 119-121 illustrate a single-use "staple pack" 1300 that can address some, if not all, of these challenges.

[0177] Figure 119 depicts a portion of a 1000' end actuator, which may be similar in construction and operation to, for example, the 1000 end actuator, as well as other end actuators disclosed herein, except for the specific differences discussed below . As can be seen in Figure 19, the upper jaw 1240 includes an open distal end 1243. The upper jaw 1240 may be formed of metallic material and has a U-shaped configuration when viewed from the distal end and includes two retaining lips. inwardly extending opposite ends 1245. End actuator 1000' further includes a lower jaw structure 1222 that is similar to, for example, the lower jaw structure 1222 described herein. As can be seen in the Figure, the lower jaw structure 1222 also has an open distal end 1223.

[0178] Still referring to Figure 119, a form of "single-use" staple pack 1300 includes an anvil 1302 that has a staple-forming surface 1304 that includes a plurality of staple-forming pockets (not shown) that are formed in the same. The staple package 1300 further includes a staple cartridge 1310 that has a cartridge holder 1312 that is configured for spaced engagement in relation to the lower staple forming surface 1304 of the anvil 1302. The staple cartridge 1310 may be similar to others. staple cartridges described in more detail herein and operatively supports a plurality of surgical staples therein. The staple pack 1300 further includes a disposable retainer member 1320 that is sized and shaped to frictionally engage the anvil 1302 and staple cartridge 1310 so as to maintain alignment between the staple pockets on the lower staple forming surface 1304 and the staples (not shown) inside the 1310 staple cartridge before use. Keeper 1320 may also include a spacer strip 1322 that extends between anvil 1302 and staple cartridge 1310. Keeper can, for example, be molded from plastic or other suitable polymeric material and spacer strip 1322 can be manufactured from metallic material. The spacer strip 1322 may be frictionally retained in a slot or other retention feature formed in the holder 1320.

[0179] Now referring to Figure 120, the staple pack 1300 is installed by aligning the anvil 1302 with the open distal end 1243 on the upper jaw 1240 and the staple cartridge 1310 is aligned with the open distal end 1245 on the jaw frame 1222. Thereafter, the clamp pack 1300 is moved in the proximal "DP" direction to the position shown in Figure 120. The retaining lips 1245 serve to support the anvil 1302 within the upper jaw 1240. The end actuator 1000 ' may also include a manually operable lock feature 1340 that can be moved from an unlocked position (Figure 119) to a locked position (Figure 121). When in the locked position, for example, the lock feature 1340 holds the anvil 1302 within the upper jaw 1240 and the staple cartridge 1310 within the frame of the lower jaw 1222. For example, the lock feature 1340 may include an arm. top locking device 1342 that is configured to releasably engage a portion (e.g., a lip, retainer, boss, or other retaining feature(s)) formed at the proximal end of the anvil 1302. Likewise, the locking feature 1340 may include a movable lower locking arm 1344 that is configured to releasably engage a portion (e.g., a lip, retainer, boss, or other retaining feature(s)) formed in the staple cartridge 1310. Upper and lower locking arms 1342, 1344 may be pivotally or otherwise movably supported on end actuator 1000' for selective movement between locked and unlocked positions. In various forms the upper and lower locking arms 1342, 1344 can normally be forced into the closed position by a spring or springs (not shown). In such arrangements, the clinician may insert the staple pack 1300 into the upper jaw 1240 and lower jaw frame 1222. As the proximal end of the anvil 1302 contacts the upper locking arm 1342, the upper locking arm 1342 is pivoted or moved to allow the anvil 1302 to settle into position. Once the anvil is seated in position, the upper locking arm 1342 is forced into locked engagement with the anvil 1302 (if a spring or pressure member is employed). In alternative arrangements, the upper locking arm 1342 may be manually moved to the locked position. Similarly, as the proximal end of the staple cartridge 1310 contacts the lower locking arm 1344, the lower locking arm 1344 is pivoted or moved to allow the staple cartridge 1310 to seat into position. Once the staple cartridge 1310 is seated in position, the lower locking arm 1344 is forced into locked engagement with the staple cartridge 1310 to retain it in position (if a tilt or spring arrangement is used). In alternative embodiments, the lower locking arm 1344 can be manually moved to the locked position. Once the staple pack 1300 has been installed and the anvil 1302 and staple cartridge 1310 have been locked or otherwise secured to the end actuator 1000', the clinician may remove the retainer assembly 1320. See, for example , Figure 121. After the staple pack 1300 has been used, the clinician can then replace the retainer 1320 over the distal ends of the anvil 1302 and staple cartridge 1310. This can be accomplished by aligning the open end of the retainer member. 1320 and then pressing retainer member 1320 back into frictional engagement with anvil 1302 and staple cartridge 1310. Once the distal ends of anvil 1302 and staple cartridge 1310 have been seated in retainer member 1320, the clinician may move the upper and lower locking arms 1342, 1344 to their unlocked positions to allow the staple pack 1300 to be pulled out of the upper gripper frame 1240 and the jaw. lower ra 1222. Thereafter, the staple pack 1300 can be discarded as a unit. In other situations, the clinician may separately remove anvil 1302 and staple cartridge 1310 from end actuator 1000' without first installing retainer member 1320.

[0180] Figures 38-41 depict a surgical end actuator 2000 comprising a surgical instrument for cutting and fixing of a type that may commonly be termed a "short-cut stapler". Various forms of such stapling devices are disclosed in, for example, US Patent No. 6,988,650 entitled RETAINING PIN LEVER ADVANCEMENT MECHANISM FOR A CURVED CUTTER STAPLER and US Patent No. 7,134,587 entitled KNIFE RETRACTION ARM FOR A CURVED CUTTER STAPLER, the complete descriptions of each being incorporated herein by reference. End actuator 2000 comprises an end actuator housing 2010 which can be manufactured from housing segments 2012, 2014 which are detachably coupled together by screws, pins, snap-fit features, etc. Protruding from the end actuator housing 1010 is an elongated frame assembly 2020 that terminates in an end actuator tool head 2002. In one form, the frame assembly 2020 comprises a pair of frame plates or struts. spacers 2022 that are fixedly affixed to housing 2010 and project distally therefrom. A C-shaped support frame 2024 is attached to the distal end of the frame plates 2022. The term "C-shaped" is used throughout the specification to describe the concave nature of the support structure 2024 and a cartridge module surgical 2060. C-shaped construction facilitates improved functionality and the use of the C-shaped term in this specification should be interpreted to include a variety of concave shapes that can similarly improve stapling functionality surgery and cutting instruments. The support frame 2024 is secured to the frame plates 2022 by a shoulder rivet 2023 and columns 2026 that extend from the support frame 2024 to the receiving holes in the frame plates 2022. In various ways, the support frame 2024 can be formed by means of a one-piece construction. More specifically, support structure 2024 may be formed from extruded aluminum material. By forming the support structure 2024 in this manner, several parts are not needed and the associated cost of fabrication and assembly is substantially reduced. Furthermore, the unitary structure of the support structure 2024 is believed to improve the overall stability of the end actuator 2000. Additionally, the unitary extruded structure of the support structure 2024 provides a weight reduction, easier sterilization since irradiation of cobalt will effectively penetrate the extruded aluminum and decrease trauma to the tissue based on the smooth outer surface obtained through extrusion.

[0181] The end actuator 2000 further includes a first end actuator actuation system, also called an end actuator closing system 2070 and a second end actuator actuation system, also referred to herein as a trigger system 2100 In one form, for example, the end actuator closure system 2070 includes a set of closure beams 2072 that are sized to be slidably received between the struts of the frame 2022 for axial trajectory therebetween. Closing beam assembly 2072 may also be called a first end actuator actuator and has an open bottom configured to slidably receive a set of firing bars 2112 from firing system 2100, as will be discussed in more detail below. . In one form, for example, the closure beam assembly 2072 is a molded plastic member shaped for movement and functionality, as will be discussed below. By manufacturing the 2072 plastic stop beam assembly, manufacturing costs can be reduced and the weight of the 2000 end actuator can also be reduced. In addition, the 2000 End Actuator may be easier to sterilize with cobalt irradiation as plastic is easier to penetrate than stainless steel. In accordance with an alternative arrangement, the closing beam assembly 2072 may be produced from extruded aluminum with the final features machined in place. Although an extruded aluminum blanking beam assembly may not be as easy to manufacture as the plastic component, it would still have the same advantages (i.e. elimination of components, easier to assemble, lower weight, easier to sterilize). ).

[0182] Closing beam assembly 2072 includes a curved distal end 2074 that is sized to be received between side walls 2027 of support structure 2024. Curved distal end 2074 is sized and shaped to receive and retain a cartridge housing 2062 of the cartridge module 2060. In various forms, the proximal end of the lock beam assembly 2072 is coupled to a lock nut 2084 which is threadedly received on a threaded lock shaft 2080. The lock shaft 2080 defines a axis of the CSA-CSA closure shaft and has a female socket coupler 57 which is attached to its proximal end to facilitate coupling of the closure shaft 2080 with a male coupler 51 attached to a first drive shaft of a surgical instrument. Rotation of lock shaft 2080 in a first direction will cause lock nut 2084 to drive lock beam assembly 2072 in the distal "DD" direction. Rotation of lock shaft 2080 in the opposite direction will also result in the proximal path of lock nut 2084 and lock beam assembly 2072.

[0183] As indicated above, the distal end 2074 of the closing beam assembly 2072 is configured to operatively support the cartridge compartment 2062 of a cartridge module 2060 therein. Cartridge module 2060 includes a plurality of surgical staples (not shown) on a staple driver (not shown) which, when advanced axially, drives the surgical staples out of their respective pockets 2066 positioned on either side of a slot 1068 that is configured to accommodate the passage of a blade member 2115 therethrough. Cartridge module 2060 may, for example, be somewhat similar to cartridge modules disclosed, for example, in US Patent Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587, both of which have been incorporated herein by reference in their respective entireties free from any differences noted. The End Actuator 2000 can be discarded after a single use or the End Actuator 2000 can be reusable, replacing the spent cartridge module during an ongoing procedure or for a new procedure after being re-sterilized.

[0184] The end actuator 2000 further includes a trigger system 2100 that includes a set of trigger bars 2112 that is configured to be slidably received within the open bottom of the set of closing beams 2072. See Figure 39 In one form, the trigger system 2100 further includes a trigger shaft 2102 that has a threaded distal end 2104 and a proximal portion 2106 that has a square cross-sectional shape. The threaded distal end 2104 is threadedly received within a threaded trigger nut 2110 which is secured to the proximal end of the trigger bar assembly 2112. The threaded trigger nut 2110 is sized to be slidably received within an axial cavity 2085 within the lock nut assembly 2084. See Figure 41. This arrangement allows the trigger nut 2110 to be axially advanced with the lock nut assembly 2084 when the end actuator 2000 is moved to a closed position. and then moves axially with respect to the lock nut 2084 and lock beam assembly 2072 when the trigger system 2100 is actuated. Firing axis 2102 defines an axis of the FSA-FSA firing axis that is parallel, or substantially parallel, to the axis of the closing axis CSA-CSA. See, for example, Figure 41. As can also be seen in Figures 39 and 41, the proximal portion 2106 of the trigger shaft 2102 is slidably received within an elongated passageway 2105 within a female socket coupler 57. ' which is otherwise identical to the female socket couplers described herein. Elongated passage 2105 has a square cross-sectional shape that is sized to slidably receive proximal portion 2106 of firing shaft 2102 therein. This arrangement allows the trigger shaft 2102 to move axially with respect to the female socket coupler 57' while being rotated with the female socket coupler 57'. Thus, when the lock beam assembly 2072 is advanced in the distal "DD" direction by actuation of the first surgical instrument drive system, the trigger nut 2110 will be carried in the distal "DD" direction within the lock nut assembly. 2084. Proximal portion 2106 of trigger shaft 2102 will move axially within passage 2105 in female socket coupler 57' while engaged therewith. Thereafter, activating the second drive system in a rotating direction on the surgical instrument, which is operatively coupled to the female socket coupler 57' will rotate the trigger shaft 2102, which will cause the trigger bar assembly 2112 to move. in the distal direction "DD". As the firing bar assembly 2112 moves in the distal direction, the blade bar is advanced distally 2115 through the cartridge module 2060. Driving the second drive system in a second rotational direction will cause the blade assembly to trigger bar 2112 moves in the proximal "DP" direction.

[0185] The distal end of the firing bar system 2112 includes a drive member 2114 and blade member 2115 projecting distally therefrom. As can be seen in Figure 39, blade member 2115 is slidably received within an anvil arm portion 2142 of an anvil assembly 2140 that is configured to be seated within a curved anvil support portion. 2025 of the support frame 2024. More details regarding the anvil assembly 2140 can be found in US Patent Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587. End actuator 2000 may also include a safety latch mechanism 2150 (Figure 39) to prevent firing of a previously fired cartridge module 2060. Details on the interaction between the cartridge module and the 2060 safety lock mechanism can be found in US Patent Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587.

[0186] The end actuator 2000 also includes a tissue retention pin drive mechanism 2160. The tissue retention pin drive mechanism 2160 includes a saddle-shaped blade 2162 that is positioned in a top portion of the housing 2010. Blade 2162 is pivotally connected to a push rod driver 2163 that is slidably supported within housing 2010. The push rod driver 2163 is prevented from moving longitudinally along the axis of the actuator 2000. Push rod driver 2163 is connected to push rod 2164 by a circumferential groove 2165 in push rod 2164 that fits into a slot 2166 of push rod driver 2163. See Figure 41. A distal end of the push rod 2164 contains a circumferential groove 2167 that interconnects with a groove 2172 at a proximal end of a coupler 2170 that is attached to the cartridge module 2 160 (best seen in Figure 41). The distal end of the coupler 2170 contains a groove 2174 for interconnecting with a circumferential slot 2182 over a retaining pin 2180. Manual movement of the blade 2162 results in movement of the pressure rod 2164. Distal movement or proximal retraction of the clamping rod. pressure 2164 results in corresponding movement of the retaining pin 2180. The actuation mechanism 2160 of the retaining pin 2180 also operatively interacts with the closing beam assembly 2072 such that the actuation of the closing system 2070 will result in automatic distal movement of the closing beam 2072. retaining pin 2180 if it has not already been manually moved to its most proximal position. When retaining pin 2180 is advanced, it extends through cartridge housing 2062 and into anvil assembly 2140 to thereby capture tissue between cartridge module 2060 and anvil assembly 2140.

[0187] In one form, the retaining pin drive mechanism 2160 includes a hook 2190 pivotally or pivotally supported within the housing 2010 by means of a pivot pin 2192. The closing beam assembly 2072 further includes columns or pins 2073 extending laterally on either side of the closing beam assembly 2072 within the housing 2010. These columns 2073 are slidably received within corresponding arcuate slots 2194 in the hook 2190. The hook 2190 contains positioned cam pins 2196 to push the cam surfaces 2168 over the push rod driver 2163. The hook 2190 is not directly attached to the retaining pin 2180 so that the surgeon, if they choose, can advance the retaining pin 2180 manually. The Retaining Pin 2180 will automatically advance if the surgeon chooses to leave the Retaining Pin 2180 alone when the Closing Beam Assembly 2072 is advanced distally to a closed position. The surgeon must retract the 2180 Retaining Pin manually. By constructing the 2160 detent pin drive mechanism in this manner, manual closing and retraction of the 2180 detent pin is allowed. If the surgeon does not manually close the retaining pin 21280, the present retaining pin drive 2160 will do so automatically during instrument clamping. More details regarding actuation and use of the retaining pin can be found in US Patent Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587.

[0188] The 2000 End Actuator may also be equipped with various sensors that are coupled to a 2120 End Actuator Contact Plate mounted inside the 2010 End Actuator Housing. For example, the 2000 End Actuator may include a closure sensor 2122 which is mounted within the housing of the end actuator 2010 and is electrically coupled to the end actuator contact plate 2120 so that when the end actuator 2000 is operatively coupled to the surgical instrument, the closure sensor 2122 is in communication with the surgical instrument control system. The lock sensor 2122 may comprise a Hall effect sensor 7028 as shown hereafter with respect to Figures 61, 63 which is configured to detect the position of a keying pin 2086 in the lock nut 21084. See Figure 40. In addition In addition, a trigger sensor 2124 may also be mounted within the housing of the end actuator 2010 and be arranged to detect the location of the trigger nut 2110 within the lock nut 2084. The trigger sensor 2124 may comprise a Hall effect sensor 7028 as described hereinafter with respect to Figures 61, 63 and be electrically coupled to the end actuator contact plate 2120 for final communication with the surgical instrument control system, as discussed herein. The 2120 contact plate can be positioned with the 2020 end actuator housing so that when the 2000 end actuator is operatively coupled to the surgical instrument, the 2120 end actuator contact plate is electrically coupled to an end actuator contact plate 2120. surgical instrument 30 mounted in the surgical instrument compartment 12, as discussed above.

[0189] The use of end actuator 2000 will now be explained in connection with surgical instrument 10. It will be appreciated, however, that end actuator 2000 may be operatively coupled to various other surgical instrument arrangements disclosed herein. Prior to use, the lock shaft 2080 and the trigger shaft 2102 are "synchronized" or positioned in their starting positions to facilitate attachment to the first and second drive shafts 22, 42, respectively. To couple the end actuator 2000 to the surgical instrument 10, for example, the clinician moves the end actuator 2000 to a position where the axis of the closure axis CSA-CSA is in axial alignment with the first axis of the axis of closure. FDA-FDA drive and the axis of the FSA-FSA trigger axis being in axial alignment with the second axis of the SDA-SDA drive axis. The female socket coupler 57 on the closing shaft 2080 is inserted into operational engagement with the male coupler 51 on the first drive shaft 22. Likewise, the female socket coupler 57' on the triggering shaft 2102 is inserted into operational engagement with the male coupler 51 over the second drive shaft 42. Thus, when in that position, the lock shaft 2080 is operatively coupled to the first drive shaft 22 and the trigger shaft 2102 is operatively coupled to the second drive shaft 42. A End actuator contact plate 1120 is operatively coupled to surgical instrument contact plate 30 such that sensors within end actuator 2000 are in operable communication with the surgical instrument control system. To maintain the end actuator 2000 in operational engagement with the surgical instrument 10, the end actuator 2000 includes a retaining latch 2130 that is secured to the end actuator housing 2010 and is configured to releasably engage a portion of the instrument housing. 12. The retainer latch 2130 may include a retaining pin 2132 that can releasably engage a retainer cavity 15 formed in the housing 12. See Figure 1. When coupled together, the lock sensor 2122 senses the position of the lock nut. lock 2084 and the trigger sensor 2124 detects the position of the trigger nut 2110. This information is communicated to the surgical instrument control system. In addition, the physician can confirm that the shiftable transmission assembly (or transmission carriage 62 thereof) is in its first actuation position. This can be confirmed by turning on indicator light 77 over compartment 12 as discussed above. If the displaceable transmission assembly 60 is not in its first actuation position, the clinician may actuate the firing trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to the first actuation position, so that the actuation of the oscillating trigger 110 to actuate the motor 80 will result in the actuation of the first drive system 20. Assuming that the closing system 2070 and the firing system 2100 are each in their respective starting positions and the end actuator 2000 has a cartridge module of spent clips 2060 properly installed therein, the clinician can then trigger closure system 2070 to capture target tissue between cartridge module 2060 and anvil assembly 2140.

[0190] The clinician can move the closing beam assembly 2072 distally by actuating the oscillating trigger 110 to drive the motor 80 and rotate the first drive shaft 22. This drive moves the cartridge module 2060 to the anvil assembly 2140 to clamp the target tissue between them. As the closing beam 2072 moves distally, the interaction of the posts 2073 and the hook 2190 will cause the tissue retention drive mechanism 2160 to drive the retention pin 2180 distally through the support portion 2161 and through the anvil assembly 2140 into a pin pocket 2141 (see Figure 41) therein. The retaining pin 2180 serves to trap the target tissue between the anvil assembly 2140 and the cartridge module 2060. Once the target tissue has been clamped between the anvil assembly 2140 and the cartridge module 2060, the clinician can then actuating the trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to its second drive position so that the driving of the motor 80 will result in the rotation of the second drive shaft 42. Once the transmission carriage 62 is moved to the second actuation position, the clinician may again actuate the oscillating trigger 110 to actuate the second actuator system 40 and the trigger system 2100 on the end actuator 2000 to actuate the firing bar assembly 2112 distally which also actuates the triggering member. blade 2115 distally through cartridge module 2060 which cuts target tissue secured between anvil assembly 2140 and cartridge module 2060. As the firing bar assembly moves distally 2112, drive member 2114 also drives surgical clips supported on cartridge module 2060 out of cartridge module 2060 through target tissue and into contact with anvil assembly 2140. Once the action of When cutting and stapling is complete, the clinician can operate the oscillator trigger 110 to reverse the motor rotation and return the trigger system 2100 to its starting position. The clinician can then return the transmission carriage 62 to its first actuation position by means of the trigger trigger 92 such that actuation of the oscillating trigger 110 in the opposite direction will cause the motor 80 to rotate in the opposite direction to return the set. of closing beams 2073 to its starting position. As the lock beam assembly 2073 moves in the proximal direction, the hook 2190 can interact with the fabric retention pin drive mechanism 2160 to withdraw the retention pin 2180 to its starting position. Alternatively, the clinician may manually retract the retaining pin 2180 to its home position using the saddle blade 2162. The clinician may retract the retaining pin 2180 to its home position prior to activating the closure system. 2070 to return the closing beam 2072 to its starting position. More details regarding the use of curved discontinuous cutters can be found in US Patent Nos. 6,988,650 and 7,134,587.

[0191] Figures 42-45 depict a surgical end actuator 3000 comprising a surgical instrument for cutting and fixing of a type that may commonly be termed a "circular surgical stapler". In certain types of surgical procedures, the use of surgical staples has become the preferred method for suturing tissue, and for this reason specially configured surgical staplers have been developed for these applications. For example, intraluminal or circular staples have been developed for use in surgical procedures involving the lower colon where sections of the lower colon are sutured after a pathological portion has been excised. Circular clamps useful for performing such procedures are disclosed, for example, in US patent nos. 5,104,025; 5,205,459; 5,285,945; 5,309,927; 8,353,439; and 8,360,2977 which are each incorporated by reference herein in their respective entireties.

[0192] As shown in Figure 42, the 3000 end actuator comprises a 3010 end actuator housing that can be manufactured from housing segments 3012, 3014 that are detachably coupled together by screws, pins, snap fit etc. Protruding from the end actuator housing 3010 is an elongated shaft assembly 3020. The elongated shaft assembly 3020 is configured to operationally support and interact with a circular tool head 3300 and an anvil 3320. As evidenced by US patents In the examples referenced above, a variety of different circular staple anvil and cartridge arrangements are known in the art. As shown in Fig. 43, for example, the circular stapler head 3300 may include a housing member 3302 which supports a cartridge holder assembly in the form of a circular staple driver assembly 3304 thereon which is adapted to interface with a circular staple cartridge 3306 and drive the staples supported thereon to form contact with the staple forming surface 3326 of the anvil 3320. A circular blade member 3308 is also centrally disposed within the staple driver assembly 3304 The proximal end of housing member 3302 may be coupled to an outer tubular cover 3022 of arcuate shaft assembly 3020 by a distal ferrule member 3024. Anvil 3320 includes a circular body portion 3322 that has an anvil shaft 3324 for attach a trocar to it. The anvil body 3322 has a clamp forming surface 3326 thereon and may also have a housing 3328 attached to the distal end thereof. The anvil shaft 3324 may additionally be provided with a pair of trocar retention clips or leaf springs 3330, which serve to releasably retain the trocar 3042 in a retaining engagement with the anvil shaft 3324, as will be discussed below. discussed below in more detail.

[0193] In one form, the shaft assembly 3020 includes a compression shaft 3030, a distal compression shaft portion 3032, and a tension band assembly 3040 which are operatively supported within the outer tubular housing 3022. A tip 3042 is secured to a distal end of the tension band assembly 3040 by fasteners 3041. As is known, the trocar tip 3042 may be inserted into the anvil shaft 3324 of the anvil 3320 and retained in the engagement by trocar retention clips. 3330.

[0194] The Surgical End Actuator 3000 further includes a Closure System 3070 and a Trigger System 3100. In at least one form, the Closure System includes a set of Closure Nuts 3084 that are secured to the proximal end of the tension band 3040. As can also be seen in Figures 42 and 43, the lock nut assembly 3084 includes a proximal coupling member 3085 that is secured to the proximal end of the tension band 3040 by a fastener 3087. The lock system 3070 further includes a threaded lock shaft 3080 that is in threaded engagement with lock nut 3084. Lock shaft 3080 defines an axis of the CSA-CSA lock shaft and has a female socket coupler 57 attached to its proximal end to facilitate coupling the closure shaft 3080 with a male coupler 51 which is attached to a first drive shaft in a surgical instrument. Rotation of lock shaft 3080 in a first direction will cause lock nut 3084 to drive tension band assembly 3040 in the distal "DD" direction. Rotation of lock shaft 3080 in the opposite direction will also result in proximal travel of lock nut 3084 and tension band assembly 3040.

[0195] As can be seen in Figure 43, the distal compression shaft portion 3032 is coupled to the staple driver assembly 3304. In this way, the axial movement of the compression shaft 3030 within the outer tubular housing 3022 causes the clamp driver assembly 3304 to move axially within housing member 3302. The axial trajectory of compression shaft 3030 is controlled by firing system 3100. In one form, firing system 3100 includes a threaded firing shaft 3102 that is in threaded engagement with a threaded trigger nut 3110 that is attached to the proximal end of the compression shaft 3030. The trigger shaft 3102 defines an axis of the FSA-FSA trigger axis that is parallel with, or substantially parallel with, the geometric axis of the closing axis CSA-CSA. See, for example, Figures 44 and 45. The proximal end of the trigger shaft 3102 has a female socket coupler 57 attached thereto to facilitate coupling of the trigger shaft 3102 with a male coupler 51 which is attached to a second shaft. of actuation in a surgical instrument. Activation of the second surgical instrument drive system in a rotary direction will rotate the trigger shaft 3102 in a first direction to thereby drive the compression shaft 3030 in the distal "DD" direction. As the compression shaft moves 3030 in the distal "DD" direction, the circular staple drive assembly 3304 is driven in the distal direction to drive the surgical staples on the staple cartridge 3306 to form contact with the underside 3326 of the anvil body 3322. In addition, circular knife member 3308 is driven through the fabric stapled between anvil body 3322 and staple cartridge 3306. Driving the second drive system in a second rotational direction will cause the compression axis 3030 moves in the proximal "DP" direction.

[0196] The 3000 End Actuator may also be equipped with various sensors that are coupled to a 3120 End Actuator Contact Plate mounted inside the 3010 End Actuator Housing. For example, the 3000 End Actuator may include a sensor Closure(s) 3122 which are mounted within the housing of the 3010 end actuator and are electrically coupled to the 3120 end actuator contact plate so that when the 3000 end actuator is operatively coupled to the surgical instrument, the ) 3122 closure sensor(s) are in communication with the surgical instrument control system. The lock sensor(s) 3122 may comprise Hall effect sensors 7028 as described below with respect to Figures 61, 63 which are configured to sense the position of lock nut 3084. See Figure 44. Trigger sensor(s) 3124 may also be arranged within the end actuator housing 3010 and be arranged to detect the location of trigger nut 3110 within lock nut 3084. O( s) 3124 trip sensor(s) may also comprise 7028 Hall Effect sensors as described below with respect to Figures 61, 63 and be electrically coupled to the 3120 end actuator contact plate for final communication with the surgical instrument, such as cable processor 7024, for example, as described in more detail below with reference to Figures 61, 63, 64. Contact plate 3120 can be positioned with end actuator housing 3020 so that when the act End actuator 3000 is operatively coupled to the surgical instrument, the end actuator contact plate 3120 is electrically coupled to a surgical instrument contact plate 30 mounted in the surgical instrument housing 12, as discussed above.

[0197] The use of end actuator 3000 will now be explained in connection with surgical instrument 10. It will be appreciated, however, that end actuator 3000 may be operatively coupled to various other surgical instrument arrangements disclosed herein. Prior to use, the lock shaft 3080 and the trigger shaft 3102 are "synchronized" or positioned in their starting positions to facilitate attachment to the first and second drive shafts 22, 42, respectively. To couple the end actuator 3000 to the surgical instrument 10, for example, the clinician moves the end actuator 3000 to a position where the axis of the closure axis CSA-CSA is in axial alignment with the first axis of the axis of closure. FDA-FDA drive and the axis of the FSA-FSA trigger axis being in axial alignment with the second axis of the SDA-SDA drive axis. The female socket coupler 57 on the closing shaft 3080 is inserted into operational engagement with the male coupler 51 on the first drive shaft 22. Likewise, the female socket coupler 57 on the triggering shaft 3102 is inserted into operational engagement with the male coupler 51 over the second drive shaft 42. Thus, when in that position, the lock shaft 3080 is operatively coupled to the first drive shaft 22 and the trigger shaft 3102 is operatively coupled to the second drive shaft 42. The plate The end actuator contact plate 3120 is operatively coupled to the surgical instrument contact plate 30 such that sensors 3122, 3124 within the end actuator 3000 are in operable communication with the surgical instrument control system. To maintain the end actuator 3000 in operational engagement with the surgical instrument 10, the end actuator 3000 includes a retaining latch 3130 that is secured to the end actuator housing 3010 and configured to releasably engage a portion of the instrument housing 12 The retainer latch 3130 may include a retaining pin 3132 that can releasably engage a retainer cavity 15 formed in housing 12. See Figure 1. When coupled together, the lock sensor 3122 senses the position of the lock nut. 3084 and the trigger sensor 3124 detects the position of the trigger nut 3110. This information is communicated to the surgical instrument control system. In addition, the physician can confirm that the shiftable transmission assembly (or transmission carriage 62 thereof) is in its first actuation position. This can be confirmed by turning on indicator light 77 over compartment 12 as discussed above. If the displaceable transmission assembly 60 is not in its first actuation position, the clinician may actuate the firing trigger 92 to move the transmission carriage 62 to the first actuation position, so that the actuation of the oscillating trigger 110 to actuate the motor 80 will result in the actuation of the first drive system 20. Assuming that the closing system 3070 and the firing system 3100 are each in their respective starting positions and the end actuator 3000 has a cartridge module of unworn clamps properly installed in it, the 3000 End Actuator is ready to use.

[0198] As is known, when performing an anastomosis using a circular stapler, the bowel can be stapled using a conventional surgical stapler with multiple rows of staples being placed on either side of a target section (i.e. specimen) of the intestine. The target section is typically cut simultaneously as the section is stapled. After removing the target specimen, the clinician inserts the anvil 3320 into the proximal portion 302 of the bowel, close to the staple line. This can be done by inserting the anvil body 3322 into an inlet port cut in the proximal bowel portion or the anvil 3320 can be placed trans-anally by placing the anvil 3320 at the distal end of the end actuator 3000 and inserting an instrument. through the rectum. The physician then attaches the anvil shaft 3324 to the trocar tip 3042 of the end actuator 3000 and inserts the anvil 3320 into the distal portion of the intestine. The clinician may then tie the distal end of the proximal section of bowel to the anvil shaft using a 3324 suture or other conventional tying device and may also secure the proximal end of the distal portion of the bowel around the anvil shaft 3324 using another suture. .

[0199] The clinician can then move the tension band assembly 3040, trocar tip 3042 and anvil 3320 attached to it proximally by actuating the oscillating trigger 110 to drive the motor 80 and rotate the first drive shaft 22. This actuation moves the anvil 3320 for cartridge 3306 supported on housing member 3302 of stapler head 3300 to close the gap therebetween and thereby engage the proximal end of the distal bowel portion with the distal end of the proximal bowel portion in the gap therebetween. The clinician continues to drive the first drive system 20 until a desired amount of tissue compression is achieved. Once the bowel portions have been stapled between the anvil assembly 3320 and the stapler head 3300, the clinician can then actuate firing trigger 92 to move transmission carriage 62 to its second actuation position so that actuation of the motor 80 will result in the rotation of the second drive shaft 42. Once the transmission carriage 62 is moved to the second drive position, the clinician may again actuate the oscillating trigger 110 to drive the second drive system 40 and trigger system 3100, on end actuator 3000 to drive compression shaft 3030 distally which also drives the circular staple driver assembly 3304 and circular knife member 3308 distally. This action serves to cut the stapled pieces of intestine and drive the surgical staples through both stapled ends of the intestine, thus bringing the portions of the intestine together and forming a tubular route. Simultaneously, as the staples are driven and formed, the circular knife 3308 is driven through the ends of the intestinal tissue, cutting the ends adjacent to the inner row of staples. The physician can then withdraw the End Actuator 3000 from the intestine and the anastomosis is complete.

[0200] Figures 46-49 illustrate another 3000' Surgical End Actuator that may be identical to the 3000 Surgical End Actuator described above, except for the differences noted below. Those components of the surgical end actuator 3000' which are the same as the components in the surgical end actuator 3000 described above will be designated with the same element numbers. Those components of the Surgical End Actuator 3000' which may be similar in operation, but not identical to the corresponding components of the Surgical End Actuator 3000', will be designated with the same component numbers together with a "'". As can also be seen in Figures 46-49, the surgical end actuator 3000' includes an actuation release assembly, generally designated as 3090, which is advantageously configured to allow the clinician to disengage a distal portion of a drive train at from a proximal portion of a drive train.

[0201] In the embodiment shown, the trigger release assembly 3090 is used in connection with the closure system 3070', so that in the event that the distal portion of the closure system inadvertently becomes trapped or otherwise otherwise deficient, the clinician can quickly mechanically separate the distal drive train portion from the proximal drive train portion of the closure system. More specifically, and with reference to Figure 47, the tension band assembly 3040 and trocar tip 3042 (See Figures 42, 43, and 45) may also be referred to as the "distal drive train portion" 3092 of the lock 3070' and lock shaft 3080 and lock nut assembly 3084 may, for example, be called the "proximal drive train portion" 3094 of lock system 3070'. As can be seen in Figure 47, one form of drive release assembly 3090 includes a distal coupling member 3095 that is attached to a proximal end of tension band assembly 3040. Distal coupling member 3095 may be attached to the assembly. tension band 3040 by pressure adjustment, adhesive, soldering, soldering, etc., or any combination of such fastening mechanisms. Distal coupler member 3095 is sized to be slidably received within a slot 3097 in proximal coupler member 3085' which is secured to set of lock nuts 3084. Distal coupler member 3095 includes a distal orifice 3096 therethrough. is configured to axially register a proximal hole 3098 in the proximal coupler member 3085', when the distal coupler member 3095 is seated within the slot 3097. See Figure 48. The drive release assembly 3090 further comprises a drive coupler pin 3099 which is sized to be received within axially aligned holes 3096, 3098 to retainly couple distal coupler member 3095 to proximal coupler member 3085'. Stated another way, drive coupler pin 3099 serves to mechanically and releasably couple distal drive train portion 3092 to proximal drive train portion 3094. Drive coupler pin 3099 extends along a AC-AC coupling axis which is transverse to the geometric axis of the closing axis CSA. To provide distance for the drive coupler pin 3099 to move axially with respect to the trigger nut 3110, an axial slot 3111 is provided in the trigger nut 3110. As can be seen in Figure 46, the end actuator housing portion 3014 ' is provided with a clearance slot 3016 that extends axially to facilitate the axial path of the drive coupler pin 3099 during actuation of the closing system 3070'. Such an arrangement allows the clinician to quickly decouple the distal drive train portion 3092 from the proximal drive train portion 3094 at any time during use of the end actuator 3000' simply by removing or pulling the drive coupler pin 3099. transversely out of holes 3096, 3098 to allow distal coupler member 3095 to be disengaged from proximal coupler member 3085'.

[0202] While the 3090 trigger release assembly has been described in connection with the 3000' end actuator closing system 3070', the trigger release assembly may alternatively be used in connection with the trigger system 3100 of the 3000' end actuator. In other embodiments, a trigger release assembly 3090 may be associated with the lock system and a second trigger release assembly may be associated with the trigger system. Thus, one or both of the proximal portions of the drive train can be selectively mechanically separated from the respective distal drive train portions. Furthermore, such actuation release assembly can be effectively used in connection with the closing and/or tripping systems of at least some of the other surgical end actuators disclosed herein, including but not necessarily limited to, for example, the actuator end actuator 1000 and end actuator 2000 and their equivalent arrangements.

[0203] Figures 50-53 illustrate another 2000' Surgical End Actuator that may be identical to the 2000 Surgical End Actuator described above, except for the differences noted below. Those components of the surgical end actuator 2000' which are the same as the components in the surgical end actuator 2000 described above will be designated with the same element numbers. Those components of the Surgical End Actuator 2000' which may be similar in operation, but not identical to the corresponding components of the Surgical End Actuator 2000', will be designated with the same component numbers together with a "'". As can also be seen in Figures 51-53, the surgical end actuator 2000' may be provided with indicator arrangements to provide a visual indication as to the tripping status of the closing and tripping systems.

[0204] More particularly, and with reference to Figures 51 and 52, the lock system 2070 includes a set of lock system status, generally designated as 2090. In one form, for example, the set of lock system status 2090 includes a lock indicator member 2092 that is secured to, or otherwise extends from, lock nut 2084'. The closure system status assembly 2090 further includes a closure indicator window 2094 or opening in the end actuator housing 2010 so that the position of closure indicator member 2092 can be evaluated by the clinician by viewing the closure indicator member 2092 2092 through the closure indicator window 2094. Similarly, the trigger system 2100' may include a set of trigger system status, generally designated as 2130. In one form, for example, the trigger system 2130 includes a member lock indicator 2132 which is attached to, or otherwise extends from, lock nut 2110'. The trigger system status assembly 2130 further includes a trigger indicator window 2134 in the end actuator housing 2010 so that the position of the trigger indicator member 2132 can be evaluated by the clinician by viewing the trigger indicator member 2132 through of the 2134 trigger indicator window.

[0205] Closing system status set 2090 and triggering system status set 2130 reveal the mechanical state of closure system 2070 and triggering system 2100. The mechanical state of the distal end of the end actuator can generally be observed by the doctor, but is sometimes covered or obstructed by tissue. The mechanical state of the proximal portion of the end actuator cannot be seen without a window projection or arrangement indicator. Color coding on the outside of the shaft arrangement and/or on the indicator can also be used to provide the clinician with confirmation that the end actuator has been fully closed or triggered (eg green indicator for fully closed). For example, the close indicator member 2092 may have a close tag 2093 on it which is visible through the close indicator window 2094. In addition, the compartment 2010 may have a first close signal 2095 and a second close signal 2096 adjacent to the close indicator window 2094 to evaluate the position of the close indicator 2092. For example, the first close signal 2095 may comprise a first bar having a first color (e.g. orange, red, etc.) and the second closing signal may comprise a bar or section of a second color which is different from the first color (eg green). When the closure mark 2093 on the closure indicator member 2092 is aligned with the most proximal end of the first closure signal bar 2095 (this position is represented by element number 2097 in Figure 50), the clinician can observe that the system 2070 is in its untriggered position. When the closing mark 2093 is aligned within the first closing signal bar 2095, the clinician can observe that the closing system 2070 is partially actuated - but not fully actuated or fully closed. When the lock mark 2093 is aligned with the second lock signal 2096 (represented by element number 2098 in Figure 50), the clinician can observe that the lock system 2070 is in its fully engaged or fully closed position.

[0206] Similarly, the trigger indicator member 2132 may have a trigger mark 2133 thereon which is visible through the trigger indicator window 2134. In addition, the magazine segment 2014' may have a first trigger signal 2135 and a second trigger signal 2136 adjacent the trigger indicator window 2134 for evaluating the position of the close indicator 2132. For example, the first trigger signal 2135 may comprise a first bar having a first trigger color (e.g., orange , red, etc.) and the second trigger signal may comprise a second trigger bar or section of a second trigger color that is different from the first trigger color (e.g. green). When the trigger mark 2133 on the trigger indicator member 2132 is aligned with the most proximal end of the first trigger signal bar 2135 (this position is represented by element number 2137 in Figure 50), the clinician can observe that the system trigger 2100 is in its non-triggered position. When the trigger mark 2133 is aligned within the first trigger signal bar 2135, the clinician can observe that the trigger system 2100 is partially triggered - but not fully triggered or fully triggered. When the trigger mark 2133 is aligned with the second trigger signal 2136 (represented by element number 2138 in Figure 50), the clinician can observe that the trigger system 2170 is in its fully triggered or fully closed position. Thus, the clinician can determine the extent to which the closing and triggering systems have been activated by observing the position of the indicators within their respective windows.

[0207] In the alternative arrangement, indicator windows 2094 and 2134 can be provided in the end actuator housing 2010' so that when the closing system and tripping system 2070 2100' are in their start or non-actuated positions , the respective indicators 2092, 2132 can be fully seen in the indicator windows 2094, 2134, respectively. As the closing system 2070 and triggering system 2100' are activated, their indicators 2092, 2132 will move out of their indicator windows 2094, 2134. The physician can then assess the extent to which each one of the systems 2070, 2100' has been triggered noting how many of the indicators 2092, 2132 are visible through windows 2094, 2134.

[0208] Closing system status set 2090 and triggering system status set 2130 reveal the mechanical state of closure system 2070 and triggering system 2100 if end actuator 2000' is attached to the cable or housing of the surgical instrument or not. When the End Actuator 2000 is attached to the cable or housing, the Closure System Status Assembly 2090 and the Trigger System Status Assembly 2130 will provide the clinician with the opportunity to determine the mechanical states of these systems as a primary check or secondary to the state shown on the surgical instrument handle or housing. The Closure System Status Assembly 2090 and the Trigger System Status Assembly 2130 also serve as a primary check when the end actuator 2000' is separated from the surgical instrument cable or housing. In addition, these triggering and closing system assemblies may be effectively used in connection with the closing and/or triggering systems of at least some of the other surgical end actuators disclosed herein, including, but not necessarily limited to, for For example, end actuator 1000 and end actuator 3000 and their equivalent arrangements.

[0209] Figures 54-60 illustrate another 2000” Surgical End Actuator that may be identical to the 2000' Surgical End Actuator described above, except for the differences noted below. Those components of the Surgical End Actuator 2000' which are the same as the components in the Surgical End Actuator 2000' described above will be designated with the same element numbers. Those 2000” Surgical End Actuator components which may be similar in operation, but not identical to the corresponding 2000' and/or 2000 Surgical End Actuator components, will be designated with the same component numbers together with a "''". As can also be seen in Figures 54-60, the surgical end actuator 2000" includes an actuation disengagement assembly, generally designated as 2200, which is advantageously configured to allow the clinician to disengage a distal portion of a drive train at from a proximal portion of a drive train.

[0210] In the embodiment shown, the actuation release assembly 2200 is used in connection with the closing system 2070” of the end actuator 2000”, so that in the case where the distal portion of the closing system becomes, inadvertently stuck or otherwise deficient, the clinician can quickly mechanically separate the distal drive train portion from the proximal drive train portion of the closure system. More specifically, and with reference to Figure 56, the lock system assembly 2072 may also be referred to as the "distal drive train portion" 2202 of the lock system 2070” and lock shaft 2080 and lock nut assembly. closure 2084” may, for example, be called the “proximal drive train portion” 2204 of the closure system 2070”. As can be seen in Figure 59, the lock nut assembly 2084', while substantially identical to the lock nut assemblies 2084, 2084' described above, is supplied in two parts. More specifically, the lock nut assembly 2084" includes an upper threaded portion 2210 that is in threaded engagement with the lock shaft 2080 and a lower portion 2214 that supports the trigger nut 2110 for axial movement therein in the manner discussed above. Bottom portion 2214 of lock nut assembly 2084" is directly attached to lock beam assembly 2072 and includes lock indicator member 2092", which functions in the same manner as lock indicator 2092 discussed above.

[0211] In at least one form, the drive release assembly 2200 includes a drive coupler pin 2220, which serves to couple the lower portion 2214 of the lock nut assembly 2084" to the upper portion 2210. Figure 59, for example, the upper portion 2210 of the locknut assembly 2084" includes a first mortise slot segment 2212 that is configured for alignment with a second mortise slot segment 2216 in the lower portion 2214 of the locknut assembly. lock 2084”. When the first and second slotted segments 2212, 2216 are aligned as shown in Figure 59, they form a hole 2215 into which the barrel portion 2222 of the drive coupler pin 2220 can be inserted to engage the upper and lower portions 2010 and 2014, together, as shown in Figure 56. Stated another way, the drive coupler pin 2220 serves to mechanically and releasably couple the distal drive train portion 2202 to the proximal drive train portion 2204 of the delivery system. closing 2070”. The drive coupler pin 2220 extends along an AC-AC coupling axis that is transverse to the axis of the closing axis CSA. See Figure 56. To provide clearance for drive coupler pin 2220 to move axially with locknut assembly 2084”, housing segment 2014” of end actuator housing 2010” is provided with a clearance slot axially extending 2224. Such an arrangement allows the clinician to quickly decouple the distal drive train portion 2202 from the proximal drive train portion 2204 at any time during use of the end actuator 2000” simply by removing or pulling. drive coupler pin 2220 transversely out of hole 2215 formed by slotted slot segments 2212, 2216. Once drive coupler pin 2220 has been removed from hole 2215, lower portion 2214 of closure assembly 2084" can be removed. moved relative to upper portion 2212 to thereby allow tissue to be released between cartridge module 2060 and anvil assembly 214 0.

[0212] Figures 54-56 show the 2000” End Actuator in an “open position” prior to use. As can be seen in these Figures, for example, a 2060 cartridge module is installed and ready to use. Figures 57 and 58 show end actuator 2000 in its closed state. That is, the closing beam 2080 has been rotated to drive the set of closing nuts 2084” in the distal direction "DD". Because the lower portion 2214 of the lock nut assembly 2084" is attached to the upper portion 2210 by the drive coupler pin 2220, the lock beam assembly 2072 (because it is attached to the lower portion 2214) is also moved distally into its position. closed to clamp the target tissue between cartridge module 2260 and anvil assembly 2140. As discussed above, saddle-shaped slider 2162 in housing 2010” is moved distally to cause the retention pin to extend through from the cartridge compartment and to the anvil assembly 2140 to thereby capture the tissue between the cartridge module and 2060 and the anvil assembly 2140. As discussed in detail above, when the lock nut assembly 2084" moves distally, the trigger nut 2110 also moves distally which drags the proximal portion 2106 of the trigger shaft 2102 out of the elongated passage for the female socket coupler 57'. See Figure 58. Figure 59 illustrates drive coupler pin 2220 removed from hole 2215 formed by slotted slot segments 2212, 2216. Once drive coupler pin 2220 has been removed from hole 2215, the drive train portion 2202 (Closing Beam Assembly 2072) can be moved in the proximal "DP" direction by moving the saddle slider 2162 proximally. This movement of the knob 2162 will move the lock beam assembly 2072, the lower portion 2014 of the lock nut assembly 2084", the trigger nut 2110 and trigger bar assembly 2112, as well as the retaining pin proximally. This movement will allow the tissue to be released between the cartridge module 2060 and the anvil assembly 2140.

[0213] Figure 61 is a block diagram of a motor-driven modular surgical instrument 7000 comprising a handle portion 7002 and a shaft portion 7004; Modular Motor Driven Surgical Instrument 7000 is representative of a modular surgical instrument system generally designated as 2 which, in one form, includes a motor driven surgical instrument 10 that can be used in connection with a variety of surgical end actuators, such as, for example, end actuators 1000, 2000, and 3000, as shown in Figure 1. Having described various functional and operational aspects of the modular motor-driven surgical instrument 10 in detail here above, for brevity and clarity of disclosure such details will not be repeated in the following description associated with Figures 61-64 Instead, the description of Figures 61-64 that follows will focus primarily on the functional and operational aspects of the electrical systems and subsystems of the Modular Motor Driven Surgical Instrument 7000, which can be applied in whole or in part to the modular motor-driven surgical instrument described above.

[0214] Consequently, returning now to Figure 61 the modular motor-driven instrument 7000 comprises a handle portion 7002 and a shaft portion 7004. The handle and shaft portions 7002, 7004 comprise respective electrically coupled electrical subsystems 7006, 7008 via a communications and power interface 7010. The electrical subsystem components 7006 of the cable portion 7002 are supported by the previously described control board 100. The communications and power interface 7010 is configured so that the electrical signals and power can be easily exchanged between the cable portion 7002 and the shaft portion 7004.

[0215] In the illustrated example, the electrical subsystem 7006 of the cable portion 7002 is electrically coupled to the various electrical elements 7012 and a screen 7014. In one example, the screen 7014 is an organic light emitting diode (OLED), although the screen 7014 should not be limited in the present context. The electrical subsystem 7008 of the shaft portion 7004 is electrically coupled to the various electrical elements 7016, which will be described in detail below.

[0216] In one aspect, the electrical subsystem 7006 of the cable portion 7002 comprises a solenoid driver 7018, an accelerometer 7020, a controller/motor driver 7022, a cable processor 7024, a voltage regulator 7026, and is configured to receive inputs from a plurality of switches 7028. Although, in the illustrated embodiment, switches 7028 are designated as Hall switches, switches 7028 are not limited in this context. In various aspects, the 7028 Hall Effect sensors or switches may be located either on the end actuator portion of the instrument, on the shaft, and/or on the cable.

[0217] In one aspect, the electrical subsystem 7006 of the cable portion 7002 is configured to receive signals from a solenoid 7032, a clamp position switch 7034, a trigger position switch 7036, a motor 7038, a battery 7040, a 7042 OLED interface board, and 7044 open switch, 7046 closed switch, and 7048 trip switch. In one respect, the 7038 motor is a brushless DC motor, although in many respects the motor is not limited in this context. . However, the 7038 engine description may be applicable to the previously described 80, 480, 580, 680, 750 and 780 engines. Solenoid 7032 is a representative example of the previously described shifter solenoid 71.

[0218] In one aspect, the electrical subsystem 7008 of the shaft portion 7004 comprises an axis processor 7030. The electrical subsystem 7008 of the shaft is configured to receive signals from various switches and sensors located in the end actuator portion of the instrument, which are indicative of the state of clamp jaws and cutting element in the end actuator. As illustrated in Figure 61, the axis electrical subsystem 7008 is configured to receive signals from a clamp open state switch 7050, a clamp closed state switch 7052, a trigger start state switch 7054, and a 7056 end-of-firing state switch, which are indicative of clipping and cutting element states.

[0219] In one aspect, the 7024 cable processor may be a general purpose microcontroller suitable for medical and surgical instrument applications and including motion control. In one example, the 7024 cable processor may be a TM4C123BH6ZRB microcontroller obtained from Texas Instruments. The 7024 cable processor may comprise a 32-bit ARM® Cortex™-M4 80-MHz processor core with System Timing (SysTick), nested vector interrupt controller (NVIC), wake-up interrupt controller (WIC) with clock port, memory protection unit (MPU), IEEE754 compliant single-precision floating point unit (FPU), built-in trace and macro trace port, system control block (SCB), and thumb-2 instruction set , among other features. The 7024 cable processor can comprise on-chip memory such as single-cycle flash-up from 256 KB up to 40 MHz. A prefetch accumulator can be provided to improve performance above 40 MHz. Additional memory includes a 32KB single-cycle SRAM, internal ROM loaded with TivaWare™ for C Series software, 2KB EEPROM, among other features such as two Controller Area Network (CAN) modules, using CAN version 2.0 part A/B and with bit rates up to 1 Mbps.

[0220] In one aspect, the 7024 cable processor can also comprise advanced serial integration, including eight universal asynchronous receivers/transmitters (UARTs), with IrDA, 9 bits, and ISO 7816 support (a UART with a modem state and modem flow control). Four Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) modules are provided to support operation for Freescale SPI, MICROWIRE or synchronous serial interfaces from Texas Instruments. Additionally, six Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) modules provided Standard (100 Kbps) and Fast (400 Kbps) transmission and support for sending and receiving data as either a master or a slave, for example.

[0221] In one aspect, the 7024 cable processor also comprises a 32-channel ARM PrimeCell® configurable μDMA controller, providing a way to offload data transfer tasks from the Cortex™ M4 processor, allowing for more efficient use of the processor and the available bus bandwidth. Analog support functionality includes two 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 24 analog input channels and a sampling rate of one million samples/second, three analog comparators, 16 digital comparators, and a regulator on-chip voltage, for example.

[0222] In one aspect, the 7024 cable processor also comprises advanced motion control functionalities such as eight Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) generator blocks, each with a 16-bit counter, two PWM comparators, a of PWM signal, a deadband generator, and a trigger-ADC/stop switch. Eight PWM fault inputs are provided to promote low latency shutdown. Two quadrature decoder interface (QEI) modules are provided, with a position integrator to track decoder position and velocity capture using built-in timer.

[0223] In one aspect, two ARM FiRM compatible watchdog timers are provided along with six 32-bit general-purpose timers (up to twelve 16-bit). Six 64-bit wide (up to twelve 32-bit) general-purpose timers are provided, as well as 12 16/32-bit and 12 32/64-bit PWM Capture Comparison (CCP) pins, for example. Up to 120 general purpose input/outputs (GPIOs) can be provided, depending on configuration, with programmable control for GPIO interrupts and pad configuration, and highly flexible pin multiplexing. The 7024 cable processor also comprises lower-power battery-backed sleep module with real-time clock. Multiple clock sources are provided for the microcontroller system clock and include a precision oscillator (PIOSC), main oscillator (MOSC), external 32.768 kHz oscillator for the sleep module, and an internal 30 kHz oscillator.

[0224] In one aspect, the accelerometer portion 7020 of the electrical subsystem 7006 of the cable portion 7002 may be a motion sensor based on microelectromechanical systems (MEMS). As is well known, MEMS technology combines computers with small mechanical devices such as sensors, valves, gears, mirrors, and drivers embedded in semiconductor chips. In one example, the MEMS 7020-based accelerometer may comprise a low-power, 8-bit, 3-axis digital accelerometer, such as LIS331DLM obtained from STMicroelectronics, for example.

[0225] In one aspect, the 7020 accelerometer, like the LIS331DLM, can be a high-performance, low-power, three-axis linear accelerometer belonging to the "nano" family, with standard digital I2C/SPI serial interface output, which is suitable for for communication with the 7024 cable processor. The 7020 accelerometer can feature low power operating modes that enable advanced power saving and smart sleep for alarm clock functions. The 7020 accelerometer can include dynamically user-selectable full scales of ±2 g/±4 g/±8 g and is capable of measuring accelerations with output data rates from 0.5 Hz to 400 Hz, for example.

[0226] In one aspect, the 7020 accelerometer may include self-test capability to allow the user to verify sensor function in the final application. The 7020 accelerometer can be configured to generate an interrupt signal by inertial wake/free fall events as well as the position of the instrument itself. The thresholds and timing of interrupt generators can be programmable on the fly.

[0227] In one aspect, the 7022 motor controller/driver may comprise a three-phase brushless DC controller (BLDC) and MOSFET drive, such as the A3930 motor controller/driver obtained from Allegro, for example. The 7022 three-phase brushless DC motor controller/driver can be used with N-channel external power MOSFETs to drive the 7038 BLDC motor, for example. In one example, the 7022 motor controller/driver may incorporate circuitry necessary for an effective three-phase motor drive system. In one example, the 7022 motor controller/driver comprises a charge pump regulator to provide adequate door actuation (>10V) for battery voltages below 7V, and allows the 7022 motor controller/driver to operate with a reduced gate drive at battery voltages below 5.5V. Power dissipation at the charge pump can be minimized by switching from a voltage doubling mode at low supply voltage to an abandoning mode at operating voltage nominal 14 V. In one aspect, a bootstrap capacitor (a self-charging set of instructions that are executed by the computer before a program is loaded) is used to provide the above-battery supply voltage needed for N-channel MOSFETs. An internal charge pump for the upper side drive allows for dc operation (100% duty cycle).

[0228] An internal fixed frequency PWM current control circuit regulates the maximum load current. The peak load current limit can be set by selecting an input reference voltage and external sensing resistor. The PWM frequency can be set by a user-selected external RC timing network. For added flexibility, the PWM input can be used to provide speed and torque control, allowing the internal current control circuit to set the maximum current limit.

[0229] The efficiency of the 7022 motor controller/drive can be improved through the use of synchronous rectification. Power MOSFETs are trip-protected by integrated dead-time intersection control. Dead time can be set by a single external resistor.

[0230] In one aspect, the 7022 motor controller/driver indicates a logic fault in response to all zero combinations in the Hall inputs. Additional features of the 7022 motor controller/driver include high current three-phase gate drive for N-channel MOSFETs, synchronous rectification, cross-conduction protection, charge pump and top-off charge pump for 100% PWM, built-in logic decoder switch, operation over 5.5 to 50V supply voltage range, diagnostic output, provides +5V Hall sensor power, and has a low-current sleep mode.

[0231] In one aspect, the 7000 motor-driven surgical instrument is equipped with a 7038 brushless DC electric motor (brushless direct current BLDC motors, brushless BL motors), also known as electronically commutated motors. (ECMs, EC engines). One such motor is the BLDC Motor B0610H4314 available from Portescap. The BLDC B0610H4314 motor can be autoclavable. The BLDC 7038 motor is a synchronous motor that is powered by a DC (direct current) electrical source via an integrated inverter/switching power supply, which produces an alternating current (AC) electrical signal to drive the motor, such as the 7022 motor controller/driver described in the immediately preceding paragraphs. In this context, AC, alternating current, does not imply a sinusoidal waveform, but rather a bidirectional current without any restriction on the waveform. Additional sensors and electronics control the waveform and output amplitude of the inverter (and therefore the percentage of DC bus usage/efficiency) and frequency (ie, rotor speed).

[0232] The rotor part of the BLDC 7038 motor is a permanent magnet synchronous motor, but in other respects, BLDC motors can also be commutated reluctance motors, or induction motors. Although some brushless DC motors can be described as stepper motors, the term stepper motor tends to be used on motors that are specifically designed to be operated in a mode where they are often stopped with the rotor at a defined angular position.

[0233] In one aspect, the BLDC 7022 motor controller/driver needs to direct the rotation of the rotor. Therefore, the BLDC 7022 motor controller/driver requires some means to determine the orientation/position of the rotor (relative to the stator windings.). In one example, the rotor part of the BLDC 7038 motor is configured with Hall Effect sensors or a rotary encoder to directly measure rotor position. Others measure the counter-electromotive force (EMF) on the non-actuated coils to infer rotor position, eliminating the need to separate Hall effect sensors and are therefore often referred to as sensorless controllers.

[0234] In one aspect, the BLDC 7022 motor controller/driver contains 3 bi-directional outputs (ie the 3-phase frequency-controlled output) which are controlled by a logic circuit. Other, simpler controllers may employ comparators to determine when the output phase should be advanced, while more advanced controllers employ a microcontroller to control acceleration, control speed, and adjust efficiency.

[0235] Drives that produce linear motion are called linear motors. The advantage of linear motors is that they can produce linear motion without the need for a drive system such as a ball and lead screw, crown and pinion, cam, gears or belts that would be needed for rotary motors. Transmission systems are known to have lower responsiveness and reduced accuracy. The 7038 direct drive BLDC motor may comprise a notched stator with magnetic teeth and a moving drive, which has permanent magnets and coil windings. To achieve linear motion, the BLDC 7022 motor controller/driver excites the driver coil windings causing an interaction of magnetic fields resulting in linear motion.

[0236] In one aspect, the BLDC 7038 motor is a Portescap BO610 brushless DC motor that provides a combination of durability, efficiency, torque and speed in a package suitable for use in the Modular Motor Driven Surgical Instrument 7000. These BLDC 7038 motors provide proper torque density, speed, position control, and long life. The 7038 slotless BLDC motor uses an ironless cylindrical coil made with the same winding technique as ironless DC motors. The 7038 slotted BLDC motors are also autoclavable. The 7038 slotted BLDC motor may include a stator consisting of stacked steel blades with windings placed in the slots that are cut axially along the inner periphery. 7038 Brushless DC Slotted BLDC Motors provide high torque density and heat dissipation along with high acceleration. The BLDC 7038 motor three-phase configuration includes Wye connections, Hall effect sensors, 4.5-24V supply voltage. The BLDC 7038 motor housing can be made of a 303SS material and the shaft can be made of a 17 material. -4ph.

[0237] In one aspect, the 7028 Hall switches may be Hall effect sensors known under the trade name BU520245G and are unipolar integrated circuit type Hall effect sensors. These sensors operate in a supply voltage range of 2.4V to 3.6V.

[0238] In one aspect, the 7026 voltage regulator replaces the usual PNP pass transistor with a PMOS element. Since the PMOS pass-through element behaves like a reduced value resistor, the low voltage drop, typically 415 mV with 50 A of load current, is directly proportional to the load current. The low quiescent current (3.2 μA typically) is stable over the entire output load current range (0 mA to 50 mA).

[0239] In one aspect, the 7026 voltage regulator is a low drop voltage (LDO) regulator such as the TPS71533 LDO voltage regulator obtained from Texas Instruments. These LDO 7026 voltage regulators provide the benefits of high input voltage, low voltage drop, low power operation, and miniaturized packaging. The 7026 voltage regulator can operate over an input range of 2.5V and 24V, and is stable with any capacitor (>0.47 μF). The LDO voltage and low quiescent current allow operations at extremely low power levels and thus the 7026 voltage regulator is suitable for powering battery control integrated circuits. Specifically, the 7026 voltage regulator is activated as soon as the applied voltage reaches the minimum input voltage and the output is quickly available to continuously energize the operating battery charging integrated circuits of the 7002 cable portion.

[0240] In one aspect, the 7040 battery is a lithium-ion polymer (LIPO), lithium-ion polymer or more commonly lithium polymer batteries (abbreviated, Li-poly, Li-Pol, LiPo, LIP, PLI or LiP) are rechargeable batteries (secondary cell). The LIPO 7040 battery can comprise several identical secondary cells in parallel to increase the discharge current capacity, and are often available in "packages" in series to increase the total available voltage.

[0241] Additional power to modulate the 7000 motor-driven instrument system can be provided by a 7058 synchronous step-down DC-DC converter (Figure 63-A) optimized for high power density applications such as the TPS6217X family obtained with Texas Instruments. A high switching frequency of typically 2.25 MHz can be used to allow the use of small inductors and provides fast transient response as well as high output voltage accuracy by using the DCS-Control™ topology.

[0242] With a wide operating input voltage range of 3V to 17V, the 7058 synchronous step-down DC-DC converter (Figure 63-A) is well suited for 7000 modular motor-driven surgical instrument systems powered from either Li-ion battery or other battery pack as well as 12V intermediate power rails. In one aspect, a 7058 synchronous down-step DC-DC converter supports up to 0.5 A continuous current of output at output voltages between 0.9V and 6V (with 100% duty cycle mode).

[0243] Power sequencing is also possible by configuring the Enable and Power Goods pins open-drain (left open). In Power Save Mode, the 7058 synchronous step-down DC-DC converter (Figure 63-A) shows quiescent current of about 17 μA VIN. Power saving mode is activated automatically and smoothly if the load is small and maintains high efficiency throughout the load range. In shutdown mode, the 7058 synchronous step-down DC-DC converter is turned off and the shutdown current consumption is less than 2 μA.

[0244] In one aspect, the OLED 7042 interface is an interface to the OLED 7014 display. The OLED 7014 display comprises organic light-emitting diodes in which the emissive electroluminescent layer is an organic compound film that emits light in response. to an electric current. This organic semiconductor layer is situated between two electrodes, where, in general, at least one of these electrodes is transparent. The 7014 OLED display can include OLEDs from two main families. Those based on small molecules and those using polymers. Adding mobile ions to an OLED creates a light-emitting electrochemical cell or LEC, which has a slightly different mode of operation. The 7014 OLED display can use schemes that address both passive matrix (PMOLED) and active matrix. Active matrix OLEDs (AMOLEDs) require a thin film transistor backplate to toggle each individual pixel on or off, but allow for the highest resolution and larger screen sizes. In one example, the 7014 OLED screen works without a backlight. Thus, it can exhibit deep black levels and can be thinner and lighter than a liquid crystal display (LCD), making it ideally suited for use in the 7002 handle portion of the 7000 Modular Motor Driven Surgical Instrument.

[0245] In one aspect, the 7030 axis processor of the 7008 electrical subsystem of the 7004 axis portion can be implemented as a 16-bit ultra-low power mixed-signal MCU, such as the ultra-low power MSP430FR5738 MCU obtained from Texas Instruments. The 7030 Axis Processor is an ultra-low power microcontroller consisting of various device features embedded in non-volatile FRAM memory, 16-bit ultra-low power MSP430 CPU, and additional peripherals targeted for various applications. The architecture, FRAM, and peripherals, combined with seven low-power modes, are optimized to achieve extended battery life in wireless and handheld sensing applications. FRAM is a new non-volatile memory that combines the speed, flexibility and endurance of SRAM with the stability and reliability of flash, all at the lowest total power consumption. Peripherals include 10-bit A/D converter, 16-channel comparator with voltage and hysteresis reference generation capabilities, three hardened serial channels capable of I2C, SPI, or UART protocols, internal DMA, hardware multiplier , real-time clock, five 16-bit timers, among other features.

[0246] The 7030 axis processor includes a 16-bit RISC architecture up to 24 MHz clock and operates over a wide supply voltage range of 2V to 3.6V and is optimized for ultra-low power modes. The 7030 axis processor also includes intelligent digital peripherals, an ultra-low energy ferroelectric RAM, and up to 16 KB of non-volatile memory. The embedded microcontroller provides ultra-low power logging, a fast logging cycle of 125ns per word, 16KB in 1ms, and includes built-in Error Correction and Coding (ECC) and Memory Protection Unit (MPU).

[0247] Having described the electrical system, subsystems, and components of the cable and shaft portions 7002, 7004 of the modular motor-driven surgical instrument 7000, the functional aspects of the control system will now be described. Accordingly, in operation, the electrical subsystem 7006 of the cable portion 7002 is configured to receive signals from the open switch 7044, closed switch 7046, and trip switch 7048 supported in a compartment of the cable portion 7002. When a signal is received from the switch 7046 cable processor 7024 operates motor 7038 to initiate clamp arm closing. Once the clamp is closed, the clamp closed state switch 7052 on the end actuator sends a signal to the axis processor 7030, which communicates the clamp arm status to the cable processor 7024 via the communications interface and power 7010.

[0248] Once the target tissue has been stapled, the trigger switch 7048 can be actuated to generate a signal, which is received by the cable processor 7024. In response, the cable processor 7024 drives the transmission carriage to the its second drive position so that the drive of the 7038 motor will result in the rotation of a second drive shaft, as described in detail above with respect to Figures 1-8. trigger start 7054 located at the end actuator sends a signal indicative of the position of the cutting member to the axis processor 7030, which communicates the position back to the cable processor 7024 via the communications and power interface 7010.

[0249] The trigger of the first switch 7048 once again sends a signal to the cable processor 7038, which in response, triggers the second trigger system and the trigger system on the end actuator to trigger the fabric cutting member and the triangular body slider assembly distally through the surgical staple cartridge. Once the tissue cutting member and triangular body slider assembly have been driven to their most distal positions on the surgical staple cartridge, the 7056 end-of-fire switch sends a signal to the 7030 axis processor, which communicates the position back to the 7024 cable processor via the 7010 interface. The 7048 trigger switch can now be activated to send a signal to the 7024 cable processor, which operated the 7038 reverse rotation motor to return the trigger to your starting position.

[0250] The 7044 open switch drive, once again sends a signal to the 7024 cable processor, which operates the 7038 motor to open the clamp. Once open, the 7050 clamp open state switch located on the end actuator sends a signal to the 7030 axis processor, which communicates the clamp position to the 7024 cable processor. firing position 7036 provide signals to the cable processor 7024 that indicate the respective positions of the stapling arm and cutting member.

[0251] Figure 62 is a table 7060 depicting the total time to complete a stroke and load current requirements for various operations of the device's various axes; The first column 7062 from the left lists circular, contour, and TLC devices/axes. These devices/axis are compared over three different closing, opening, and tripping operations as shown in second column 7064. Third column 7066 describes the total time in seconds required for the device/axis listed in first column 7063 to complete one stroke . The fourth column 7068 lists the load current requirements in amps for the devices/shafts listed in the first column 7062 to complete the operation in the second column 7064 for a full stroke as indicated in the third column, 7066. As indicated in the graph, the closing and opening the clamping arm takes approximately the same time for each of the devices/axes listed in the first column 7062. For trip operation, the circular device/axle requires most of the load current at 15.69 A and the TLC device/shaft requires the least amount of load current at 0.69 A.

[0252] Figure 63-A is a detailed diagram of the electrical system in the cable portion 7002 of the 7000 modular motor-driven surgical instrument. As shown in Figure 63-A, the 7026 voltage regulator and 7058 DC-DC converter provide the operating voltages for the electrical system. The 7026 voltage regulator regulates the voltage of the 7040 battery. The 7024 cable processor receives input from the 7020 accelerometer. The 7086 VSS ON/OFF logic supply provides the input voltage to the 7024 cable processor and input from the VSS to the DC-DC converter 7058.

[0253] A 7072 tri-color LED is electrically coupled to the 7024 cable processor. The 7024 cable processor energizes either the 7072 red, blue, or green LED to provide visual feedback.

[0254] Three 7028 Hall effect sensors U10, U11, U12 provide three Hall effect outputs U1_Hall1, U1_Hall2, U1_Hall3 which are coupled to the 7024 cable processor as shown Output U1_Hall3 drives a 7088 LED on the board. In one aspect, the Hall Effect sensor outputs U1_Hall1, U1_Hall2, U1_Hall3, and the ANALOG_CLAMP signal are coupled to the 7024 processor to determine the position of the stapling arm and cutting member in the actuator end portion of the surgical instrument. 7000 modular motor driven, or the positions of the other 7000 instrument elements.

[0255] User key 7070 is a representative example of the previously described oscillator trigger 110 that is pivotally mounted to a pistol grip portion of the handle. The oscillator trigger 7070 is configured to actuate a first motor switch 7044, which is operatively coupled to the cable processor 7024. The first motor switch 7044 may comprise a pressure switch which is actuated by articulating the user switch 7070 for contact with the same. Actuation of the 7044 motor's first switch will result in the 7038 motor turning on such that the drive gear rotates in a first rotary direction. A second 7046 motor switch is also coupled to the 7024 cable processor and mounted for selective contact by the 7070 user switch. Actuation of the second 7046 motor switch will result in the 7038 motor starting so that the drive gear is rotated in a second direction. A trigger switch 7048 is coupled to the cable processor 7024. Actuation of the trigger switch 7048 results in the axial movement of the drive carriage to advance the cutting element as described above.

[0256] A 7074 Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) input is also coupled to the 7024 cable processor. The JTAG 7074 input is the IEEE 1149.1 Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture designed for the integrated circuit (IC) debugging. The 7024 cable processor implements the JTAG 7074 to perform debug operations such as single step and breakpoint.

[0257] A 7076 UART is coupled to the 7024 cable processor. The 7076 UART translates data between parallel and series forms. The 7076 UART is commonly used in conjunction with communication standards such as EIA, RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485. The universal designation indicates that the data format and transmission speeds are configurable. Electrical signaling methods and levels (such as differential signaling, etc.) are handled by an external trigger circuit for the 7076 UART. The 7076 UART can be an individual integrated circuit (or part of one) used for serial communications over the serial port of the 7076. 1024 cable processor. The 7076 UART can be included in the 1024 cable processor.

[0258] A description of the remaining functional and operational aspects of the electrical subsystem 7006 of the cable portion 7002 of the modular motor-driven surgical instrument 7000 will now be provided in connection with Figure 63-B. As shown, the 7024 cable processor provides a signal to drive the 7032 solenoid. A 7078 axis module provides SHAFT _IDO, SHAFT_ID1, CLAMP_HOME, and FIRE_HOME type position signals to the 7024 cable processor. A 7080 gear position module provides the position of the clamp and cutting element to the 7024 cable processor. The position information provided by the 7078 axis module and 7080 gear position module allows the 7024 cable processor to properly activate the 7038 motor when signal User keys 7070 are received to open the clamp, close the clamp, and/or trigger the cutting element.

[0259] The 7022 motor controller receives commands from the 7024 cable processor and provides the commands to the 7084 MOSFET driver, which drives the 7038 three-phase BLDC motor (Figure 61). As described earlier, the BLDC 7022 motor controller needs to direct the rotation of the rotor. Therefore, the BLDC 7022 motor controller/driver determines the rotor position/orientation in relation to the stator windings. Therefore, the rotor portion of the BLDC 7038 motor is configured with 7028 Hall Effect sensors to directly measure rotor position. The BLDC 7022 motor controller contains 3 bi-directional outputs (ie the three-phase frequency-controlled output), which are controlled by a logic circuit.

[0260] Accordingly, as depicted in Figures 61, 63-A, 63-B, and 64 an engine control system comprising the 7022 engine controller, the 7084 engine controller, the 7028 engine Hall effect sensors, in combination with the Gear Position Module 7080 and/or the Shaft Module 7078 is operable to synchronize the gears so that the male couplers on the handle portion smoothly mate with the female couplers on the shaft portion of the surgical instruments here described. In one case, for example, although some tolerances may be provided for ease of shifting or keying, the motor control system is configured to track the position of the gears to ensure that the gears do not stop in a position that would prevent a one from shifting. to the other or installing two rotary switches. In another case, the motor can be configured to be slowly indexed during installation or displacement to resolve any minor details out of synchronization conditions. These same problems can be found with the example described in relation to Figure 6 when the instrument moves between two units and not only when installing new terminal operators. This situation can be resolved by proper timing of gears employing the motor control system described in relation to Figures 61, 63-A, 63-B, and 64. In other cases, encoders may be provided to track the rotations of the motors. gear shafts/gear.

[0261] Figure 64 is a block diagram of the electrical system of the shaft and cable portions of the modular motor-driven surgical instrument; As shown in Figure 64, the 7024 cable processor receives inputs from the 7044 open switch, 7046 closed switch, 7048 trip switch, 7034 staple position switch, and 7036 trip position switch. In addition, the 7024 cable processor receives inputs from a 7090 home clamp switch and a 7092 home trigger switch from the 7078 axis module. Using various combinations of these switch inputs, the 7024 cable processor provides the appropriate commands for the 7038 motor and 7032 solenoid. A 7088 battery monitoring circuit monitors power input to the 7024 cable processor with respect to ground. The 7024 cable processor drives the 7072 tri-color LED. The 7020 accelerometer provides three-axis orientation inputs to the 7024 cable processor to determine various parameters such as the 7000 instrument orientation and whether the 7000 instrument has been discarded. The 7026 voltage regulator provides the regulated power source for the system. A 7094 current sensing module is provided to detect the current from the power source.

[0262] Figure 65 illustrates a 7095 mechanical switching motion control system to eliminate microprocessor control of motor functions. In the system described with respect to Figures 61-64, a microprocessor such as cable processor 7024 is used to control the function of motor 7038. Cable processor 7024 executes a control algorithm based on the various states of switches deployed along the path. 7000 instrument. This requires the use of the 7024 cable processor and associated identification functions to provide control for different end actuators.

[0263] As shown in Figure 65, however, an alternative technique can be used to control the 7038 motor, which eliminates the need for the 7024 cable processor by placing the keyed related motion 7096A, 7096B, 7096C, 7096D on the actuator shaft. end. The 7096A-D switches are then configured to turn specific 7038 motor functions on and off or to reverse the direction of the 7038 motor based on where specific end actuator components are positioned. In one case, a switch that indicates complete deployment of the cutting member can be used to change the functions of the 7038 motor to reverse direction and withdraw the cutting member. In another example, the 7096A-D switches could be configured to sense pressure or force so that a simple closing of the anvil below the tissue would provide an on/off signal back to the 7038 closing motor to stop motion. of closing.

[0264] In many cases, a surgical instrument may include a handle, an electric motor positioned within the handle, a shaft attachable to the handle, and an end actuator extending from the shaft, the electric motor being configured to motivate an end actuator function in the end actuator. In some cases, the surgical instrument may include a control system comprising one or more sensors and a microprocessor, which may receive input signals from the sensors, monitor the operation of the surgical instrument, and operate the electric motor to perform the function. of the end actuator in view of the sensor input signals. In at least one of these cases, the surgical instrument handle may be used with more than one axis. For example, a linear stapling axis or a circular stapling axis can be mounted on the handle. The cable may include at least one sensor configured to detect the type of shaft that has been mounted thereon and communicate that information to the microprocessor. The microprocessor may operate the electric motor differently in response to input signals from the sensor, depending on the type of shaft that has been mounted on the cable. For example, if the electric motor is configured to operate an end actuator closing system, the microprocessor will rotate the electric motor in a first direction to close a circular stapler shaft anvil and a second, or opposite direction, to closing. of a linear stapler shaft anvil. Other control systems are envisaged in which the same operational control of the electric motor can be achieved without the use of a microprocessor. In at least one of these cases, the shafts and/or handle of the surgical instrument may include switches that may operate the surgical instrument differently depending on the type of shaft that has been mounted on the handle.

[0265] In various cases, a surgical instrument system may include a power source, a first motor configured to perform a first end actuator function, a second motor configured to perform a second end actuator function, and a system control switch configured to selectively place the power source in communication with the first motor and the second motor in response to the control switch system. In many cases, such a surgical instrument system may not include a microprocessor. The first motor may comprise a closing motor of a closing system configured to close an end actuator anvil and the second motor may comprise a firing motor of a firing system configured to fire staples from a staple cartridge of the end actuator. end actuator. The control switch system may include a closing trigger switch which, when closed, can close a closing power circuit that couples the power source to the closing motor. The control system may further include a closing limit switch which can be opened by the closing system when the anvil is in a fully closed position and opening the closing power circuit to stop the closing motor and the closing trigger. The control switch system may also include a trip trigger switch, which may be part of a trip power circuit that couples the power source to the trip motor. Under various circumstances, the trigger power circuit default condition may be open, which may prevent the trigger motor from being operated before the trigger power circuit is closed. Thus, closing the trip switch alone cannot close the trip power circuit and operate the trip motor. The tripping power circuit may further include a second closing limit switch which can be closed by the closing system when the anvil is in a fully closed position. By closing the trip switch and the second closing limit switch, the trip power circuit can be closed and the trip motor operated. The control system may further include a trip limit switch that can be opened by the trip trigger when the trip trigger reaches the end of its trip. Opening the trip limit switch can open the trip power circuit and stop the trip motor. The control system may further include a second trip limit switch which can be closed by the trip driver to close a reverse trip power circuit that reverses the polarity of power applied to the trip motor and operates the trip motor. in an opposite direction and retracts the trigger. Closing the reverse trip power circuit may also require the trip trigger switch to be in a closed condition. When the trigger trigger reaches its fully retracted position, it can close a proximal trigger switch. Closing the proximal trip switch can close a reverse closing power circuit which can reverse the polarity of the power applied to the closing motor and operating the closing motor in an opposite direction and opening the anvil. Closing the reverse close power circuit may also require the close trigger switch to be in a closed condition. When the anvil reaches its fully open position, the anvil can open a proximal closing switch which can open the reverse closing power circuit and stop the closing motor. This is just an example.

[0266] In various cases, as described herein, a handle of a surgical instrument may be used with several different sets of shafts that can be selectively attached to the handle. In some cases, as also described herein, the cable may be configured to detect the type of shaft that has been mounted on the cable and operate the cable in accordance with a control system contained within the cable. For example, a cable may include a microprocessor and at least one memory unit that can store and execute a plurality of operating programs, each of which is configured to operate a specific set of axes. Other modalities are foreseen in which the cable does not include a control system; instead, the axes sets may each comprise their own control system. For example, a first set of axes may comprise a first control system and a second set of axes may comprise a second control system, and so on. In many cases, the cable may comprise an electric motor, a power source such as a battery and/or an input cable, for example, and an electrical circuit configured to operate the electric motor based on control inputs from the fixed axle assembly. The cable may further comprise a driver which, in conjunction with the shaft control system, may control the electric motor. In many cases, the cable may not comprise additional control logic and/or a microprocessor, for example to control the electric motor. With the exception of the cable drive, the cable-mounted axle assembly control system would include the control logic necessary for electric motor operation. In many cases, the axle assembly control system may include a microprocessor, while in other cases it may not. In some cases, the first control system of a first set of axes may include a first microprocessor and the second control system of a second set of axes may include a second microprocessor, and so on. In various cases, a cable may include a first electric motor, such as a closing motor, for example, and a second electric motor, such as a tripping motor, for example, whereby the control system of the fixed axle assembly can operate. the closing motor and the tripping motor. In certain cases, the cable may comprise a closing trigger and a triggering trigger. With the exception of the closing driver and tripping driver, the cable-fixed shaft assembly control system may include the control logic necessary to operate the closing motor and tripping motor. In various cases, a cable may include a shaft interface and each of the shaft sets may include a cable interface configured to engage the shaft interface. The shaft interface may include an electrical connector configured to engage a cable interface electrical connector when a shaft assembly is mounted on the cable. In at least one case, each connector may comprise only one electrical contact, which contacts are coupled together so that one and only one control path is present between the cable and the shaft assembly. In other cases, each connector may comprise only two electrical contacts which form two mated pairs when the shaft assembly is attached to the cable. In such cases, only two control routes can be present between the cable and the axle assembly. Other modalities are envisaged in which more than two control routes are present between the cable and the axle assembly.

[0267] In many cases, surgical end actuator wirings may be compatible with a surgical instrument handle. For example, a surgical end actuator may be coupled to the handle of a surgical instrument and may apply and/or implement a drive motion that has been initiated on the handle of the surgical instrument. Referring to Figures 73 and 74, the surgical end actuator 8010 may be one of several surgical end actuators that may be compatible with the handle 8000 of a surgical instrument. Several different surgical end actuators are described throughout the present disclosure and are described throughout the associated figures. The reader will understand that these various and different surgical end actuators described and depicted herein may be compatible with the same surgical instrument handle and/or may be compatible with more than one type of surgical instrument handle, for example.

[0268] Cable 8000 can include drive systems, for example, that can be configured to transfer a drive movement from cable 8000 of surgical instrument to a component, assembly and/or system of end actuator 8010. For example, cable 8000 may include a first drive system 8002a and a second drive system 8004a. In certain cases, one of the drive systems 8002a, 8004a may be configured to provide a close drive motion for the end actuator jaw assembly 8010 (Figure 73), for example, and one of the drive systems 8002a, 8004a can be configured to apply a triggering motion to a trigger element in the 8010 end actuator, for example. The 8002a, 8004a drive systems can be configured to transfer linear motion, displacement, and/or translation from the 8000 cable to the 8010 end actuator. In many cases, the first 8002a drive system can include a drive bar. 8006, which can be configured to translate and/or be linearly shifted upon activation of the first 8002a drive system. In various cases, the second drive system 8004a may include a drive bar 8008, which may be configured to translate and/or be linearly displaced upon activation of the second drive system 8004a.

[0269] In various cases, the end actuator assembly 8010 may include a first actuator system 8002b, which may correspond to the first actuator system 8002a of the cable 8000, for example, and may also include a second actuator system 8004b, which may correspond to the second drive system 8004a of cable 8000, for example. In various cases, the first drive system 8002b on the end actuator 8010 may include a drive element 8012 which is operatively and detachably coupled to the drive bar 8006 of the first drive system 8002a of the cable 8000, for example, and may be configured to receive linear motion from the 8006 drive bar, for example. In addition, the second drive system 8004b of the end actuator 8010 may include a drive element 8014, which may be operatively and removably coupled to the drive bar 8008 of the second drive system 8004a of the cable 8000, for example, and may be configured to receive linear motion from the 8008 drive bar, for example.

[0270] In various cases, the cable 8000 and/or the end actuator 8010 may include a coupling arrangement, which may be configured to releasably couple the drive bar 8006 to the drive element 8012, for example, and/or or drive bar 8008 to unit element 8014, for example. In other words, the coupling arrangement can couple first drive system 8002a of cable 8000 to first drive system 8002b of end actuator 8010 and second drive system 8004a of cable 8000 to second drive system 8004b of end actuator 8010 so that a drive force initiated at handle 8000 of the surgical instrument can be transferred to the appropriate drive system 8002b, 8004b of the attached surgical end actuator 8010. Although the surgical system depicted in Figures 73 and 74 includes a pair of systems 8002a, 8004a on handle 8000 and a matching pair of drive systems 8002b, 8004b on end actuator 8010, the reader will understand that the various coupling arrangements described herein may also be used on a surgical end actuator and/or handle. comprising a single drive system or more than two drive systems, for example.

[0271] In many cases, a coupling device for coupling a drive system on the handle of a surgical instrument to a drive system on a fixed-end actuator may include a latch, which can be configured to retain and secure the connection between the corresponding cable and the end actuator drive systems. As described in more detail herein, the latch may be spring loaded, and may be coupled to a trigger, for example, which may be configured to operatively overcome the force of a spring to unlock, open, and/or release the coupling, for example. In various cases, the coupling device may include independent and/or discrete coupling mechanisms and/or joints for each drive system 8002b, 8004b on the surgical end actuator 8010. In such cases, one of the drive systems 8002b, 8004b may be activated without activating other 8002b, 8004b drive systems. In other cases, the 8002b, 8004b drive systems may be activated simultaneously and/or concurrently, for example.

[0272] Now referring to Figures 66-72, a coupling arrangement 8100 for use with a surgical end actuator is described. For example, a surgical end actuator can be attached to a handle 8170 (Figures 67-69) of a surgical instrument via coupling arrangement 8100, for example. In various cases, the coupling device 8100 may include a housing or coupling structure 8102, for example. Coupler housing 8102 may be positioned within a proximal attachment portion of the end actuator, for example. Additionally, coupler housing 8102 may include a carriage 8104, for example, which may be configured to move relative to coupler housing 8102, for example. For example, coupler housing 8102 may include a channel 8103, which is sized and structured to slide and/or displace carriage 8104. For example, carriage may be retracted 8104 by coupler housing 8102 so that carriage 8104 is held movable in channel 8103 and is configured to move and/or slide within channel 8103. Channel 8103 may guide and/or restrict movement of carriage 8014 relative to housing 8102, for example. In certain cases, carriage 8104 may have a ramped surface, such as a ramp or wedge 8106, for example, which may further guide and/or facilitate movement of carriage 8104, for example.

[0273] In various cases, the coupling device 8100 may include a trigger 8120 in sliding engagement with the ramp 8106 of the carriage 8104. For example, the trigger 8120 may include an inclined surface 8122 that is configured to slide along the ramp 8106 of carriage 8104 when trigger 8120 is moved between a first position, or non-actuated position, (Figure 68) and a second position, or activated position (Figures 67 and 69), for example. In certain cases, coupling device 8100 may include a guide, such as guide rails 8110, for example, which may be positioned and structured to guide trigger 8120 between the first non-actuated position and the second activated position, for example. For example, coupler housing 8102 may include a pair of guide rails 8110, which may define an actuation path for trigger 8120.

[0274] In various cases, when the trigger 8120 is moved along the actuation path defined by at least one guide rail 8110 in a D1 direction (Figures 67 and 69) from a non-actuated position (Figure 68) to the driven position (Figures 67 and 69), for example, carriage 8104 can be moved downwards or in a D3 direction (Figures 67 and 69) within channel 8103 through inclined surface 8122 of trigger 8120 and ramp 8106 of the carriage 8104. Thus, activation of trigger 8120 may move carriage 8104 with respect to coupler housing 8102, trigger 8120 and/or various other components, assemblies and/or systems of coupling arrangement 8100, for example.

[0275] In various cases when trigger 8120 is moved along at least one guide rail 8110 in a D2 direction (Figure 68) from the triggered position (Figure 67 and 69) to the non-triggered position (Figure 68 ), for example, carriage 8104 can be moved upwards or in a D4 direction (Figure 68) within channel 8103 through the inclined surface 8122 of trigger 8120 and ramp 8106 of carriage 8104. Thus, actuation of trigger 8120 it can effect the movement of the carriage 8104 in relation to the coupler compartment 8102, for example. In certain cases, a spring and/or other tilting mechanism may be configured to force carriage 8104 and/or trigger 8120 into a predefined position with respect to channel 8103 and/or coupler housing 8102, for example.

[0276] Now referring to Figure 66, in various cases, a slot 8112 can be defined in the coupler compartment 8102 and/or in the end actuator. Slot 8112 may be sized to receive a drive member 8172 of handle 8170 of a surgical instrument, for example. In certain cases, a pair of slots 8112 may be defined in the coupler compartment 8102, and each slot 8112 may be configured to receive one of the drive members 8172 of the cable 8170, for example. As described in more detail herein, drive members 8172 can be coupled to, and/or otherwise driven by, a drive system on the cable 8170. For example, each drive member 8172 can be coupled to, and/or otherwise driven by, a linear drive of a drive system on the cable 8170, which can be configured to translate and provide linear drive motion to the corresponding drive system on the end actuator, for example.

[0277] In various cases, the carriage 8104 may also be configured to move and/or offset with respect to the drive member socket 8130 of the coupling arrangement 8100. This drive member socket 8130 may be configured to receive a of drive members 8172 of cable 8170, for example. Referring primarily to Figure 71, socket 8103 may include an opening 8136, which may be sized and/or structured to receive a cable drive system component 8170. For example, with reference primarily to Figure 67, opening 8136 may be configured to receive a distal portion of drive bar 8172. In such cases, when drive bar 8172 is secured within opening 8136 in socket 8130, as described in more detail here, socket 8130 may be configured to transfer a drive force from cable 8170 to the surgical end actuator through drive bar 8172 and socket engagement 8130, for example.

[0278] Still referring to Figure 67, the drive bar 8172 can include a slope 8176 and a groove or clod 8174, for example, which can facilitate the engagement and/or locking of the drive bar 8172 to the socket 8130. In these cases, the drive member socket 8130 can be clamped and/or secured inside the end actuator and/or inside the coupler housing 8102, for example, and the carriage 8104 can be configured to move and/or move. with respect to and/or around socket 8130 when carriage 8104 slides into channel 8103 in coupler compartment 8102.

[0279] Referring primarily to Figure 71, socket 8130 may include at least one flexible tab 8132a, 8132b. 71, socket 8130 may include at least one flexible tab 8132a, 8132b. Flexible tab 8132a, 8132b may be biased inwardly toward opening 8136 and/or may include an inwardly biased tooth, for example. In certain cases, flexible tabs 8132a, 8132b may include tooth 8133, for example, which may be configured to engage groove 8174 in drive bar 8172 when drive bar 8172 is inserted into opening 8136 in socket 8130. For example, slope 8176 of drive bar 8172 may pass tooth 8133 within socket opening 8136, and may flex or deflect tab 8132 outward from opening 8136. As drive bar 8172 continues to enter in opening 8136 of socket 8130, tooth 8136 of tab 8132a, 8132b may engage or catch groove 8174 in drive bar 8172. In such cases, tooth engagement 8136-groove 8174 may releasably hold drive bar 8172 inside socket 8130, for example.

[0280] In various cases, socket 8130 may include a recess 8134, which may be configured to receive a spring 8150, for example. In other cases, socket 8136 may include more than one recess 8134, and coupling arrangement 8100 may include more than one spring 8150, for example. Also, in certain cases, socket 8130 may include more than one flexible tab 8132a, 8132b. For example, socket 8130 may include a pair of laterally positioned tabs 8132a, 8132b. A first flap 8132a may be positioned on a first side side of socket 8130, for example, and a second flap 8132b may be positioned on a second side side of socket 8130, for example. In certain cases, tabs 8132a, 8132b may be deflected away from opening 8136 to accommodate entry of drive bar 8172, for example. In other cases, socket 8130 may not include an inwardly forced flap and/or may include more than two flaps, for example.

[0281] In various cases, the coupling arrangement 8100 may also include a latch or sleeve 8140, which may be movably positioned with respect to the socket 8130. For example, the latch 8140 may include an opening 8142 (Figure 72), which may be sized and structured to at least partially circumvent at least a portion of socket 8130. For example, latch 8140 may be positioned around socket 8130, and may be movably positioned with respect to socket tabs 8132a, 8132b 8130, for example. In various cases, spring 8150 can be positioned between a portion of socket 8130 and a portion of latch 8140, for example, so that spring 8150 can force latch 8140 into a socket-locked position (Figure 68). For example, spring 8150 can force the latch into the locking position of socket 8140 (Figure 68), in which latch 8140 is positioned to engage and/or restrict outward deflection of tab(s) 8132a , 8132b.

[0282] In various cases, when latch 8140 is positioned to limit and/or prevent outward deflection of tab(s) 8132a, 8132b, i.e., in the socket-lock position, movement to the exterior of the flap(s) 8132a, 8132b away from the opening 8136 may be limited so that the flap(s) 8132a, 8132b may block and/or otherwise prevent the entry and/or release of drive bar 8172 relative to opening 8136 in socket 8130, for example. Also, when the 8120 trigger moves from the non-actuated position (Figure 68) to the activated position (Figure 67 and 69), the 8140 latch can overcome the force of the 8150 spring(s), for example, and can be moved from the socket-locked position (Figure 68) to an unlocked position (Figures 67 and 69). When in the unlocked position, the latch 8140 can be moved away from the flexible tab(s) 8132a, 8132b so that the flexible tab(s) 8132a, 8132b can ) be diverted to the outside, for example, and socket 8130 can receive drive bar 8172, for example.

[0283] In various cases, the latch 8140 may comprise a ledge or bulge 8144. Further, referring primarily to Figure 70, the carriage 8104 in the coupler compartment 8102 may include a pressure member 8108. The pressure member 8108 may include a ramp or angled surface, for example, that can be configured to force the bulge 8144, and thus the latch 8140, between the socket's first or locking position (Figures 67 and 69) and the second position, or locked position (Figure 68), for example. For example, when movement of trigger 8120 causes carriage 8104 to move relative to coupler housing 8102 and socket 8130, as described herein, boss 8144 can slide along the angled surface of pressure member 8108 so that that the latch 8140 moves relative to the flexible tab 8132 of the socket 8130. In such cases, the activation of the trigger 8120 can overcome the force of the spring 8150 and retract the latch 8140 from the locking position of the socket around the ( s) flexible tab(s) 8132 of socket 8130 to unlocked position. In such cases, when the latch 8140 is retracted, the flexible tab(s) 8132 may be allowed to deflect and/or engage an actuation bar 8172. In addition, when the trigger is not engaged, the spring 8150 can force the latch 8140 in relation to and/or around the flexible tab(s) 8132a, 8132b such that the deflection of the tab(s) 8132a, 8132b and therefore , engagement with a drive bar 8172, is limited and/or prevented, for example.

[0284] In certain cases, the latch 8140 may include a pair of laterally opposed projections -8144, which can slidably engage the laterally opposed pressure members 8108 of the carriage 8104. Furthermore, in cases where the coupling arrangement 8100 couples more than one drive system between handle 8170 and surgical end actuator, for example, carriage 8104 may include multiple push members 8108, and/or multiple pairs of push members 8108. For example, each socket 8130 might include a pair of laterally positioned lugs 8144, and carriage 8104 may include a pressure member 8108 for each lug 8144, for example.

[0285] Referring mainly to Figure 68, before activating trigger 8120 and/or upon releasing trigger 8120, trigger 8120 can be positioned in the distal, non-actuated position, carriage 8104 can be positioned in the raised position in relative to the coupler compartment 8102, and the latch 8140 can be positioned in the socket-lock position. In such an arrangement, latch 8140 may prevent entry and/or engagement of drive bar 8172 with socket 8130, for example. In various cases, the spring(s) 8150 and/or a different spring and/or pressure member may force the trigger 8120 to the non-actuated position, the carriage 8104 to the raised position, and/or the latch 8140 to the socket lock position, for example. To connect and/or attach one of the drive bars 8172 to one of the sockets 8130, referring now to Figure 67, the trigger 8120 can be moved to the proximal, driven position, which can move the carriage 8104 to the lowest position. , which can move the lock 8140 to the unlocked position, for example. In such an arrangement, a drive bar 8172 may be configured to enter and/or be received by socket 8130, for example.

[0286] After that, if trigger 8120 is released, referring now to Figure 68, for example, spring(s) 8150 can force trigger 8120 back to distal position, not triggered, can force carriage 8104 to the raised position, and can force the 8140 latch back into a socket-lock position. Consequently, drive member 8172 can be locked into engagement with socket 8130, because lock 8140 can prevent outward deflection of flexible tabs 8132a, 8132b, and thus can secure drive member 8172 within socket 8130, for example. Accordingly, referring now to Figure 69, to decouple drive member 8172 from socket 8130, trigger 8120 can again be moved to the proximal driven position, which can move carriage 8104 to the lowest position, which can shift the 8140 lock to the unlocked position, for example. In such an arrangement, that is, when socket 8130 is unlocked, drive member 8172 can be removed from socket 8130, for example.

[0287] In many cases, a surgical instrument may include a drive system coupled to a motor. In certain cases, the motor and drive system can affect various surgical functions. For example, the motor and drive system can effect the opening and/or closing of a surgical end actuator, and can effect a cut and/or firing stroke, for example. In certain cases, the motor and drive system can affect several different surgical functions. For example, the opening and closing of the surgical end actuator may be separate and distinct from cutting and/or firing the fasteners from the surgical end actuator. In such cases, the drive system may include a transmission and/or clutch assembly, which can shift the engagement of the drive system between the different output systems, for example.

[0288] In many cases, a surgical instrument may include a drive system having multiple output shafts, and a clutch for shifting between the different output shafts. In certain cases, the output shafts may correspond to different surgical functions. For example, a first output shaft may correspond to a closing movement of the end actuator, and a second output shaft may correspond to a triggering movement of the end actuator, for example. In various cases, the drive system may alternate between engagement with the first output shaft and the second output shaft, for example, such that the surgical functions are separate and distinct and/or independent. For example, an end actuator closing motion can be separate and distinct from an end actuator tripping motion. For example, it may be preferable to start a closing move and, after the closing move is completed, to start a separate trigger move. Furthermore, it may be preferable to control and/or trigger the closing movement and the independent triggering movement with a single drive system, which can be coupled to an electric motor, for example. In other cases, the first output shaft and the second output shaft may be operatively coupled and the various surgical functions and/or surgical movements may occur simultaneously and/or at least partially, simultaneously, for example.

[0289] Referring now to Figures 75-78, a handle 8600 for a surgical instrument may include a drive system 8602, which may include a first drive output system 8610 and a second drive output system 8620, for example . In various cases, when an end actuator is attached to cable 8600, the first output drive system 8610 may be coupled to a first drive system on the fixed end actuator, and the second output drive system 8620 may be coupled to to a second drive system on the fixed-end actuator. The first output drive system 8610 can perform a first surgical function, such as clamping the end actuator jaws, for example, and the second output drive system 8620 can perform a second surgical function, such as triggering a triggering element. triggering through the end actuator, for example. In other cases, the surgical functions with respect to the first output drive system 8610 and the second output drive system 8620 may be reversed and/or otherwise modified, for example.

[0290] In various cases, the drive system 8602 may include a motor assembly, which may include an electric motor 8640 and a motor shaft 8642. A drive gear 8644 may be mounted on the motor shaft 8642, for example, so that the electric motor 8640 drives and/or affects the rotation of the drive gear 8644. In various cases, the first output drive system 8610 may include a first drive shaft 8612 and a first driven gear 8612. The first gear drive 8614 may be mounted on first drive shaft 8612, for example, so that rotation of first driven gear 8614 effects rotation of first drive shaft 8612. In various cases, a linear drive 8616 may be threadedly positioned over the first drive shaft 8612, and rotation of the first drive shaft 8612 can effect linear displacement of the linear drive 8616, for example. Furthermore, in various cases, the second output drive system 8620 may include a second drive shaft 8622 and a second driven gear 8624. The second driven gear 8624 may be mounted on the second drive shaft 8622, for example, so that that rotation of second driven gear 8624 effects rotation of second drive shaft 8622. In various cases, a linear drive 8626 may be threadedly positioned about second drive shaft 8624, and rotation of second drive shaft 8624 may perform linear displacement of the 8626 linear driver, for example.

[0291] In various cases, the drive system 8602 may further comprise a shifter or transmission assembly 8648. The shifter assembly 8648 may be configured to change the engagement of the drive gear 8644 between the first output drive system 8610 and the second 8620 output drive system, for example. For certain cases, the shifter assembly 8648 may include a shift gear 8652, which may be in meshed engagement with the drive gear 8644, for example. In addition, shift gear 8652 may be configured to shift or move between a range of positions, for example, and may remain in meshed engagement with drive gear 8644 as shift gear 8652 moves. if within the range of positions.

[0292] For example, the shift gear 8652 can move in and/or out of engagement with at least one of the first driven gear 8614 and/or the second driven gear 8624. In many cases, the shift gear 8652 can move in meshed engagement with the second driven gear 8624 of the second output drive system 8620. For example, when in a first position (Figure 78) of the range of positions, the shift gear 8652 can be disengaged from the second gear. driven gear 8624, and when in a second position (Figure 77) of the range of positions, shift gear 8652 can be engaged with second driven gear 8624, for example. In cases where shift gear 8652 is engaged with second driven gear 8624, shift gear 8652 can transfer a force from drive gear 8644 to second driven gear 8624 so that motor 8640 can perform a surgical function. through the second 8620 output drive system, for example. Also, in cases where shift gear 8652 is disengaged from second driven gear 8624, rotation of motor 8640 may not be transferred to second output drive system 8620, for example.

[0293] In various cases, the shifter assembly 8648 may further comprise an idler and/or transfer gear 8654. The gear of 8642 may be configured to transfer a driving force from the shift gear 8652 to the first driven gear 8614, e.g. example. In various cases, transfer gear 8654 may be in meshed engagement with first drive gear 8614, for example, so that rotation of transfer gear 8654 is transferred to first driven gear 8614, for example. Also, in many cases, the shift gear 8652 may move in and/or out of engagement with the transfer gear 8654. For example, when in the first position (Figure 78) of the range of positions, the shift gear shift gear 8652 may be engaged with transfer gear 8654, and when in the second position (Figure 77) of the range of positions, shift gear 8652 may be disengaged from transfer gear 8654, for example. In cases where shift gear 8652 is engaged with transfer gear 8654, shift gear 8652 may transfer a force from drive gear 8644 to first driven gear 8614 through transfer gear 8654. In such cases, the 8640 motor can perform the surgical function through the first 8610 output drive system, for example. Also, in cases where shift gear 8652 is disengaged from transfer gear 8654, the rotation of motor 8640 may not be transferred to first output drive system 8610, for example.

[0294] In various cases, the transfer gear 8654 can be pivotally mounted on the second drive shaft 8622 of the second output drive system 8620. For example, the transfer gear 8654 can be configured to rotate with respect to the second drive shaft 8622, without rotating the second drive shaft 8622 and the second driven gear 8624 attached thereto. In various cases, displacer assembly 8648 may include a bracket or collar 8650, which may at least partially surround shift gear 8652. Bracket 8650 may be positioned around shift gear 8652, for example, so that 8650 bracket movement can move 8652 shift gear.

[0295] In various cases, the 8600 handle and/or the 8648 shift assembly may further include an 8630 trigger or clutch. The 8630 clutch may be configured to shift the 8650 bracket and/or 8652 shift gear within the range of positions. For example, clutch 8630 may comprise a trigger extending from handle 8600, and may be engaged with bracket 8650 and/or shift gear 8652. In various cases, bracket 8650 may include a pin 8656, which may extend from bracket 8640 into an opening 8638 (Figure 75) in clutch 8630. For example, clutch 8630 may include an arm 8632 and/or a pair of arms 8632 coupled to a pivot point 8634 on cable 8600. Clutch 8630 can rotate at pivot point 8634, for example, linkage of arm(s) 8632 can move pin 8656 of bracket 8560. Movement of bracket 8650 can shift shift gear 8652 between the first position (Figure 78). ) and a second position (Figure 77), for example.

[0296] In several cases, the movement of the bracket 8650 may be restricted so that the shift gear 8652 moves along a longitudinal axis through its range of positions. In addition, the pivoting stroke and/or range of motion of clutch 8630 may be restricted and/or limited, for example, so that shift gear 8652 remains within the range of positions as clutch 8630 pivots. Furthermore, the electric motor 8638 (Figure 75) in the clutch 8630 may be configured and/or structured to maintain and/or hold the shift gear 8652 within the range of positions and/or in alignment with one of the second gears. drive 8624 and/or transfer gear 8654, for example. In various cases, handle 8600 may include a spring or other tilting mechanism to force shift gear 8652 into one of the first or second positions. In some cases, handle 8600 may include a tilt-compliant mechanism configured to hold shift gear 8652 in its first or second position. As the shift gear 8652 is between the first position and the second position, the tilt-compliant mechanism can be dynamically unstable and act to place the shift gear 8652 in its first position or its second position. Alternatively, shift gear 8652 can be forced to an intermediate position, with shift gear 8652 being simultaneously engaged with first output drive system 8610 and second output drive system 8620, for example. Additionally or alternatively, handle 8600 may include a latch and/or detent to hold shift gear 8652 in one of the first or second positions, for example.

[0297] A surgical instrument may include a rotary drive shaft configured to operate a closing drive and a triggering drive of a surgical instrument. Referring to Figures 79-84, a surgical instrument 10000 may include a rotary drive shaft 10020, a closure drive 10030, and a trigger drive 10040. As will be described in more detail below, drive shaft 10020 may include a first thread 10024 configured to operate the closing driver 10030 and a second thread 10026 configured to operate the trigger driver 10040. In various cases, the instrument 10000 may comprise a circular stapler, for example.

[0298] The surgical instrument 10000 may comprise a frame 10002 and means for generating a rotary motion. In certain cases, rotary motion can be created by a hand-operated hand crank, for example, while in many cases, rotary motion can be created by an electric motor. In either case, the generated rotary motion may be transmitted to a rotary input shaft 10010. The rotary input shaft 10010 may include a proximal bearing portion 10011 and a distal bearing portion 10013 that are supported by the frame 10002. In various cases , the proximal bearing portion 10011 and/or the distal bearing portion 10013 may be directly supported by the frame 10002 while, in certain cases, the proximal bearing portion 10011 and/or the distal bearing portion 10013 may include a bearing positioned between input shaft 10010 and frame 10002. Input shaft 10010 may further include a gear 10012 mounted and/or keyed to input shaft 10010 so that when input shaft 10010 is rotated in direction A (Figure 79 ), gear 10012 is also rotated in direction A. Correspondingly, when input shaft 10010 is rotated in the opposite direction, that is, in direction A' (Figure 82), gear 10012 is also rotated rotated in the A' direction.

[0299] Referring primarily to Figures 79 and 80, the drive shaft 10020 may include a proximal end 10021 and a distal end 10023. The proximal end 10021 and the distal end 10023 may be pivotally supported by frame 10002. In various cases , the proximal end 10021 and/or the distal end 10023 may be directly supported by the frame 10002 while, in certain cases, the proximal end 10021 and/or the distal end 10023 may include a bearing positioned between the drive shaft 10020 and the frame 10002. Gear 10022 may be mounted and/or keyed to proximal end 10021 of drive shaft 10020. Gear 10022 is in meshed engagement with gear 10012 so that when input shaft 10010 is rotated in direction A , the drive shaft 10020 is rotated in the B direction. Correspondingly, referring to Figure 81, when the input shaft 10010 is rotated in the A' direction, the input shaft 10010 is rotated in the A' direction. drive 10020 is turned in direction B'.

[0300] Again with reference to Figure 79, the lock drive system 10030 may include a lock pin 10032 engaged with the first thread 10024 of the drive shaft 10020. The lock drive system 10030 may further comprise a lock member The locking pin 10032 is positioned within an opening defined at the proximal end of the locking member 10033. The locking pin 10032 may include a first end positioned within the groove defined by the first thread 10024. drive 10020 is rotated, a side wall of the groove may contact the first end of lock pin 10032 and displace lock pin 10032 proximally or distally, depending on the direction in which drive shaft 10020 is being rotated. For example, when drive shaft 10020 is rotated in direction B (Figure 79), lock pin 10032 can be displaced, or translated, distally as indicated by direction D. Correspondingly, when drive shaft 10020 is rotated in the B' direction (Figure 82), the locking pin 10032 can be displaced, or translated, proximally as indicated by the P direction. The locking pin 10032 can be received closely within the opening defined in the locking member 10033 of so that the displacement, or translation, of the lock pin 10032 is transferred to the lock member 10033. As the reader will appreciate, the lock pin 10032 and the lock member 10033 are prevented from rotating with respect to the frame 10002 so that that the rotation of the drive shaft 10020 is converted into the translation of the closing pin 10032 and the closing member 10033.

[0301] Referring primarily to Figure 80, the first thread 10024 extends along a first length 10025 of the drive shaft 10020. In certain cases, the first thread 10024 may extend along the entire length of the drive shaft 10020. drive shaft 10020 while, in other circumstances, first thread 10024 may extend less than the entire length of drive shaft 10020. First thread 10024 may include a proximal portion adjacent to proximal end 10021 of drive shaft 10020. drive 10020 and a distal portion adjacent the distal end 10023 of drive shaft 10020. When lock pin 10032 is at the distal portion of first thread 10024, as illustrated in Figure 81, lock member 10033 can position a surgical instrument anvil 10000 in an open position. As the drive shaft 10020 is rotated in the B' direction, the lock pin 10032 can translate proximally until the lock pin 10032 reaches the proximal portion of the first thread 10024, as illustrated in Figure 82. lock pin 10032 moves proximally, lock pin 10032 can pull lock member 10033 and anvil proximally. When the lock pin 10032 reaches the proximal portion of the first thread 10024, the anvil may be in a fully closed position.

[0302] In addition to the foregoing, the closing driver 10030 can be operated to move the surgical instrument anvil 10000 into a suitable position relative to a staple cartridge. In various cases, surgical instrument 10000 may include a driver that can be operated in a first direction to rotate input shaft 10010 in direction A and drive shaft 10020 in direction B and a second direction to rotate input shaft 10010 in direction A' and drive shaft 10020 in direction B'. In other cases, surgical instrument 10000 may include a first driver configured to rotate input shaft 10010 in direction A and drive shaft 10020 in direction B when operated, and a second driver configured to rotate input shaft 10010 in direction. direction A' and drive shaft 10020 in direction B', when operated. In either case, the operator of the surgical instrument 10000 may move the anvil of the surgical instrument 10000 to and away from the staple cartridge as needed to create a desired gap between the anvil and the staple cartridge. Such a desired gap may or may not be created when the anvil is in its fully closed position.

[0303] In addition to the foregoing, surgical instrument 10000 may include a clip configured to releasably receive and hold drive pin 10032 when closure system 10030 has reached its fully closed configuration. Referring primarily to Figures 81 and 82, surgical instrument 10000 may include a loop bar 10073 including a loop opening 10077 defined therein. As the drive pin 10032 is advanced proximally, the drive pin 10032 may become aligned with, and then at least partially introduce, the opening of the clip 10077. The clip pin 10032 may be forced toward to the lug bar 10073 by a spring 10035 positioned intermediate the closing member 10033 and a circumferential head 10037 extending around the lug pin 10032. When the lug pin 10032 is positioned distally with respect to the lug opening 10077, the spring 10035 can force drive pin 10032 against the bar of clamp 10073. When clamp pin 10032 is moved proximally by rotation of drive screw 10020 and becomes aligned with opening of clamp 10077, spring 10035 can move the drive pin 10032 upwards to open clip 10077. Drive pin 10032 can be moved upwards by spring 10035 until drive pin head 10032 enters in contact with the bar of the cleat 10073. Notably, movement of the drive pin 10032 to the opening of the cleat 10077 can cause the drive pin 10032 to become operationally disengaged from the first thread 10024. Thus, the closing system 10030 can become deactivated when the drive pin 10032 reaches the opening of the lug 10077 so that subsequent rotation of the drive shaft 10020 does not move the drive pin 10032, the closing member 10033, and the anvil operatively engaged therewith, at least until drive pin 10032 is re-engaged with first thread 10024 as described in more detail below.

[0304] As discussed above, the introduction of the drive pin 10032 to the opening of the cleat 10077 of the cleat bar 10073 can demarcate the end of the closing stroke of the closing system 10030 and the fully closed position of the anvil. In various cases, the bar of the loop 10073 cannot be movable with respect to the frame 10002 and the opening of the loop 10077 can mark a fixed position. In other cases, the bar of the cleat 10073 may be movable with respect to the frame 10002. In such cases, the final closed position of the anvil will depend on the position of the opening of the cleat 10077. As a result, the gap between the anvil and the surgical instrument staple cartridge 10000 will depend on the position of the opening of the clip 10077. Referring generally to Figures 79, the surgical instrument 10000 may further comprise a gap adjustment system 10070 configured to move the bar of the clip 10073. The gap adjustment system 10070 may comprise a knob 10072 and a drive gear 10071 engaged with knob 10072. Cleat bar 10073 may include a rack 10075 extending therefrom, which comprises a plurality of teeth. Drive gear 10071 is in meshed engagement with rack 10075 so that when knob 10072 is rotated in a first direction, rack 10075 can drive cleat bar 10073 distally, and when knob 10072 is turned in a second opposite direction to the first direction, rack 10075 can drive cleat bar 10073 proximally. When the cleat bar 10073 is moved distally, the cleat opening 10077 can be positioned so that a larger gap between the anvil and the staple cartridge can be present when the closure driver 10030 is in its fully closed position. When the cleat bar 10073 is moved proximally, the cleat opening 10077 can be positioned so that a smaller gap between the anvil and the staple cartridge can be present when the closure driver 10030 is in its fully closed position. In many cases, the opening of the clip 10077 may be positioned within a range of positions that can accommodate a range of distances between the anvil and the staple cartridge of the surgical instrument 10000.

[0305] In various cases, the span adjustment system 10070 may comprise a knob latch configured to releasably hold in position the knob 10072. For example, the frame 10002 may include a latch projection 10004 extending to therefrom, which may be received within one or more lock apertures 10074 defined in knob 10072. Lock apertures 10074 may be positioned along a circumferential path. Each latch opening 10074 can correspond to a predefined position of the closing trigger 10030, and a predefined gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridge of the surgical instrument 10000. For example, when the latch projection 10004 is positioned in a first latch opening 10074, the closing driver 10030 can be held in a first predefined position and, correspondingly, the anvil can be held in a first predefined distance from the staple cartridge. In order to move the knob 10072 to a second preset position, the knob 10072 can be lifted out of the frame 10002 so that the latch projection 10074, rotated to drive the rack 10075 and the cleat bar 10073, and then , moved to frame 10002 so that the latch projection 10004 enters a second latch opening 10074 set in button 10072. When the latch projection 10004 is positioned in the second latch opening 10074, the closing trigger 10030 can be held in a second predefined position and correspondingly the anvil can be held at a second predefined distance from the staple cartridge which is different from the first predefined distance. In order to move the knob 10072 to a third predefined position, the knob 10072 can be lifted out of the frame 10002 so that the latch projection 10004 is no longer positioned in the first or second latch opening 10074, rotated to drive the rack 10075 and the cleat bar 10073, and then moved to the frame so that the latch projection 10002 10004 enters a third latch opening 10074 defined in button 10072. When the latch projection 10004 is positioned in the third opening 10074, the closing driver can be 10030 held in a predefined third position, and correspondingly, the anvil can be held in a third predefined distance from the staple cartridge, which is different from the first and second programmed distances. The span adjustment system 10070 may further include a tilt element configured to force the knob 10072 onto the frame 10002. For example, the span adjustment system 10070 may include a spring positioned 10076 intermediate the housing 10002 and the drive gear. 10071, for example, configured to force a 10074 latch opening to engage with the 10004 latch projection.

[0306] In certain cases, the operator of the surgical instrument 10000 may be able to discern the position of the closure system 10030 by observing the position of the anvil. In some cases, however, the anvil may not be visible in a surgical field. Referring primarily to Figure 79, the surgical instrument 10000 may further comprise an anvil position indicating system 10050 configured to indicate the position of the anvil. The anvil position indicating system 10050 may include a window 10058 defined in the frame 10002 and a pivot member 10051 observable through the window 10058. The pivot member 10051 may include a pivot 10052 pivotally mounted to the frame 10002, a drive end 10054, and a screen end 10056. Pivoting member 10051 may be movable between a first position (Figure 81) which indicates that the anvil is in a fully open position, a second position (Figure 82) which indicates that the anvil is in a fully open position. fully closed position, and a range of positions between the first position and the second position, which represents a variety of anvil positions. Closure system 10030 can be configured to contact drive end 10054 of pivot member 10051 to move pivot member 10051. When drive pin 10032 is moved proximally by drive shaft 10020, referring primarily to Figure 82, the drive pin 10032 is moved proximally by drive shaft 10020. drive pin 10032 can pull lock member 10033 proximally so that a shoulder 10036 defined on lock member 10033 can contact drive end 10054 of pivot member 10051 and rotate pivot member 10051 about pivot 10052. pivot member 10051 can move the screen end 10056 within the window 10058 to indicate the position of the anvil. To facilitate this observation, frame 10002 and/or window 10058 may include one or more demarcations 10059 that may indicate the position of the anvil. For example, when the mesh end 10056 of the pivoting member 10051 is aligned with a proximal demarcation 10059 (Figure 81), the operator can determine that the anvil is in an open position, and when the mesh end 10056 is aligned with a distal demarcation 10059 (Figure 82), the operator can determine that the anvil is in the closed position. If the mesh end 10056 is positioned midway between the proximal and distal demarcations 10059, the operator can assume that the anvil is in a position between its open position and its closed position. Additional demarcations 10059 between the proximal and distal demarcations 10059 can be used to indicate additional anvil positions. When closing member 10033 is moved distally to open the anvil (Figure 84), pivoting member 10051 can pivot back to its first position and become aligned with proximal demarcation 10059 once more. Position indicating system 10050 may further include a biasing member, such as a spring, for example, configured to force pivot member 10051 into its first position.

[0307] As discussed above, the closure system 10030 of the surgical instrument 10000 may be operated to position the anvil of the surgical instrument 10000 with respect to the staple cartridge. During operation of the 10030 closing system, the 10040 triggering system cannot be operated. The trigger system 10040 cannot be operationally engaged with the drive shaft 10020 until after the closing trigger 10030 has reached its fully closed position. Surgical instrument 10000 may include a key, such as key 10060, for example, configured to switch the surgical instrument between an anvil closing mode of operation and a staple firing mode of operation. The lock driver 10030 may further comprise a key pin 10031 extending from the proximal end of the lock member 10033. When comparing Figures 81 and 82, the reader will understand that the key pin 10031 contacts key 10060 at as the closing pin is being advanced 10032 proximally to close the anvil. Key 10060 may be pivotally mounted to frame 10002 on pivot 10062 and may include one or more arms 10064 extending therefrom. Key pin 10031 can contact arms 10064 and rotate key 10060 about pivot 10062 when drive pin 10032 reaches its fully closed position. Key 10060 may further comprise an arm 10066 which extends thereto which may be configured to push a trigger nut 10042 of trigger drive 10040 into operative engagement with drive shaft 10020 when key 10060 is rotated about shaft 10062 More particularly, in at least one circumstance, arm 10066 may be configured to distally displace a pusher bar 10044, which may, in turn, push trigger nut 10042 over second thread 10026. drive 10032 and lock system 10030 can be disengaged from first thread 10024, as a result of opening clip 10077 described above, and trip nut 10042 and trip system 10040 can be engaged with second thread 10026.

[0308] In addition to the foregoing, the trigger nut 10042 may comprise a threaded opening 10041 defined therein, which may be threadedly engaged with the second thread 10026. When the closing driver 10030 is being operated, in addition to the above, the trigger nut 10042 may be positioned proximally with respect to second thread 10026 so that threaded opening 10041 is not threadedly engaged with second thread 10026. In such circumstances, trigger nut 10042 may sit idle while the trigger nut 10042 drive shaft 10020 is rotated to operate lock system 10030. When trigger nut 10042 is displaced distally, in addition to the above, threaded opening 10041 may become threadedly engaged with second thread 10026. the trigger nut 10042 is threadedly engaged with the second thread 10026, rotation of the drive shaft 10020 in the B' direction (Figure 82) will displace the trigger nut 10042 dis so. The trigger nut 10042 may include one or more anti-rotation features, such as flanges 10043, for example, which can be slidably engaged with the frame 10002 to prevent the trigger nut 10042 from rotating with the drive shaft 10020. The driver trigger 10040 may further include a trigger member coupled to trigger nut 10042 that can be pushed distally by trigger nut 10042. The trigger member may be configured to eject staples from the staple cartridge. When the trigger nut 10042 reaches the distal end of the second thread 10026, the trigger nut 10042 may become threadedly disengaged from the second thread 10026, whereby further rotation of the drive shaft 10020 in the direction B' can no longer advance. the firing nut 10042

[0309] Referring primarily to Figures 82 and 83, the surgical instrument 10000 may further comprise a reverse actuator 10047 positioned at the distal end of the second thread 10026. The trigger nut 10042 may be configured to contact the reverse actuator 10047 and displace the reverse driver 10047 distally when trigger nut 10042 reaches the distal end of second thread 10026. A pressure member, such as spring 10048, for example, can be positioned between reverse driver 10047 and frame 10002, which can be configured to resist the distal movement of the reverse driver 10047. The distal movement of the reverse driver 10047 can compress the spring 10048, as illustrated in Figure 83, and apply a pressure force proximal to the trigger nut 10042. When the drive shaft 10020 is rotated in the B direction, the proximal pressure force applied to the trigger nut 10042 can re-engage the threaded opening 10041 the trigger nut 10042 with the second thread 10026 and trigger nut 10042 can be moved proximally, as illustrated in Figure 84. 84. Proximal movement of the trigger nut 10042 can move the trigger member proximally. When moving proximally, the trigger nut 10042 can displace the drive bar 10044 so that the drive bar 10044 contacts the arm 10066 of the key 10060 and rotates the key 10060 in the opposite direction back to its non-keyed position. . At such a point, the trigger nut 10042 may become threadedly disengaged from the second thread 10026 and further rotation of the drive shaft 10020 in the B direction can no longer displace the trigger nut 10042 proximally. At that point, the trigger nut 10042 will have resumed its inactive position.

[0310] When key 10060 is rotated back to its original position, in addition to the above, arms 10064 of key 10060 can push key pin 10031 and closing member 10033 distally. Distal movement of key pin 10031 and locking member 10033 can displace drive pin 10032 from the loop opening 10077 defined in the loop bar 10073. As the drive pin 10032 exits the loop opening 10077, the pin drive pin 10032 can move downward against the pressure force of spring 10035 to slide under clamp bar 10073. Downward movement of drive pin 10032 can re-engage drive pin 10032 with first thread 10024. Further rotation of drive shaft 10020 in direction B will displace drive pin 10032 and closure member 10033 distally to open the anvil of surgical instrument 10000. At that point, surgical instrument 10000 will have been reset for subsequent use. In many cases, the staple cartridge can be replaced and/or refilled and the surgical instrument 10000 can be used once again.

[0311] As the reader will appreciate from the above, trigger bolt 10020 can displace trigger pin 10032 to operate close trigger 10030 and trigger nut 10042 to operate trigger trigger 10040. In addition to the above , drive screw 10020 can move drive pin 10032 along a first length 10025 of drive bolt 10020. Similarly, drive bolt 10020 can move drive nut 10042 along a second length 10027 of the drive screw 10020. The first length 10025 can define a closing stroke of the closing system 10030 and the second length 10027 can define a tripping stroke of the tripping path 10040. The first length 10025 can be longer than the second length 10027 , although the second length 10027 may be longer than the first length 10025 under certain circumstances. In use, lock pin 10032 can pass through trip nut 10042. For example, when lock pin 10032 is moved proximally to close the anvil, lock pin 10032 can pass through trip nut 10042 when trip nut 10042 is in its inactivated position. Similarly, lock pin 10032 may pass trigger nut 10042 in its inactive position when lock pin is moved distally 10032 to open the anvil. In order to facilitate this relative movement, the trigger nut 10042 may include an opening, such as a slot 10046, for example, defined therein, through which the lock pin 10032 can pass as the lock pin 10032 moves. with respect to trip nut 10042. Such an opening defined in trip nut 10042 may also allow trip nut 10042 to slide across lock pin 10032 in various other embodiments.

[0312] In addition to the above, the first length 10025 and the second length 10027 may at least partially overlap. Furthermore, the first thread 10024 and the second thread 10026 may at least partially overlap. The first thread 10024 and the second thread 10026 may be set on the same portion of the drive screw 10020. The first thread 10024 and the second thread 10026 may be sufficiently different that the locking pin 10032 does not follow the second thread 10026 and so that the trigger nut 10042 does not follow the first thread 10024. For example, the first thread 10024 may include a first thread pitch and the second thread 10026 may include a second thread pitch which is different from the first thread pitch. The first thread pitch of the first thread 10024 may or may not be constant. In the case where the first thread pitch is constant, the closing pin 10032 and the anvil operatively engaged with the first thread 10024 will move at a constant speed during the entire closing stroke for a given rotational speed of the drive shaft 10020 In the case where the first thread pitch is not constant, the closing pin 10032 and the anvil will move at different speeds during the closing stroke for a given rotational speed of the drive shaft 10020. For example, the distal portion of the first thread 10024 may include a thread pitch that is greater than the thread pitch of the proximal portion of the first thread 10024. In such circumstances, the anvil will move rapidly away from its open position and move more slowly one step at a time. as it approaches its closed position for a given rotational speed of drive shaft 10020. Such an arrangement would allow the anvil to be moved quickly into position against tissue positioned midway between the anvil and staple cartridge and then slower once the anvil has engaged with the tissue in order to minimize the possibility of tissue overcompression. In various other cases, the distal portion of the first thread 10024 may include a thread pitch that is less than the thread pitch of the proximal portion of the first thread 10024. In either case, the thread pitch may change between the ends of the thread. first thread 10024. This change can be linear and/or non-linear.

[0313] In addition to the above, the second thread pitch of the second thread 10026 may or may not be constant. In the case where the second thread pitch is constant, the trigger pin 10042 and the anvil operatively engaged with the second thread 10026 will move at a constant speed throughout the closing stroke for a given rotational speed of the drive shaft 10020 In the case where the second thread pitch is not constant, the trigger nut 10042 and the trigger member will move at different speeds during the trigger stroke for a given rotational speed of the drive shaft 10020. For example, the distal portion of the second thread 10026 may include a thread pitch that is less than the thread pitch of the proximal portion of the second thread 10026. In such circumstances, the firing member moves more slowly at the end of its firing stroke to a given rotational speed of drive shaft 10020. Such an arrangement would slow down the firing member once it has reached the end of the staple forming process. Furthermore, such an arrangement could generate a greater amount of torque at the end of the firing stroke, which correlates with the completion of the staple forming process. In various other cases, the distal portion of the second thread 10026 may include a thread pitch that is greater than the thread pitch of the proximal portion of the second thread 10026. In either case, the thread pitch may change between the ends of the thread. second thread 10026. This change can be linear and/or non-linear.

[0314] Returning now to Figures 86-93, a surgical instrument 10500 may include a shaft 10504, and an end actuator 10505. The end actuator 10505 may include a staple cartridge 10506 and a movable anvil 10508. The surgical instrument 10500 may include a closure driver, including a closure member operatively engaged with the anvil 10504, and a trigger driver including a trigger member configured to implement staples of the staple cartridge 10506. Surgical instrument 10500 may include means for generating a rotary motion. , such as a hand crank and/or an electric motor, for example. Rotary motion may be transmitted to an input shaft 10510. Surgical instrument 10500 may include a transmission 10502 which is configured to selectively transmit rotation of input shaft 10510 to the closing driver and firing driver, as discussed in more detail below.

[0315] Input shaft 10510 may include an input gear 10512 mounted and/or keyed while rotating with input shaft 10510. Input shaft 10510 may be pivotally supported by a surgical instrument frame 10500 at one end 10511 and a distal end 10519. Input gear 10512 may be in mesh engagement with an idler gear 10522 mounted and/or keyed to an idler shaft 10520. Thus, when input shaft 10510 and input gear 10512 are rotated in direction A (Figure 89), idler shaft 10520 and idler gear 10522 are rotated in direction B (Figure 89). Similar to the above, the idler shaft 10520 may be pivotally supported by the surgical instrument frame by a proximal end 10521 and a distal end 10529. The idler shaft 10520 may further include a threaded portion 10524 that can be threadedly engaged with a displacer block 10526. Referring primarily to Figure 87, displacer block 10526 may include one or more threaded openings 10527 threadedly engaged with threaded portion 10524. When idler shaft 10520 is rotated in direction B, referring primarily to Figure 89 , idler shaft 10520 can displace displacer block 10526 proximally.

[0316] In addition to the above, displacer block 10526 may include a gear slot 10528 defined therein. Input shaft 10510 may further include a slider gear 10516 slidably mounted thereto, which is positioned in gear slot 10528. When displacer block 10526 is moved proximally by idler shaft 10520, as discussed above, displacer block 10526 may pushing slide gear 10516 proximally along a portion of keyed input shaft 10514. Referring primarily to Figure 87, slide gear 10516 may include an opening 10517 defined therein including one or more flat surfaces, e.g., the which are aligned with corresponding flat surfaces on keyed input shaft portion 10514. Flat surfaces of opening 10517 and keyed input shaft portion 10514 may allow sliding gear 10516 to be slid longitudinally along input shaft 10510 and further cooperate to transmit the rotational motion between the sliding gear 10516 and input shaft 10510. As will be described in more detail below, shifter block 10526 can slide slider gear 10516 through a first range of positions where slider gear 10516 is engaged with lock shaft 10530, a second range of positions in which the slide gear 10516 is engaged with a trigger shaft 10540, and a null position, or a range of null positions, between the first range and the second range of positions in which the slide gear 10516 is not engaged with the closing axis 10530 or the triggering axis 10540.

[0317] In addition to the above, Figure 85 illustrates the anvil 10508 of the end actuator 10505 in a fully closed position and a trigger trigger 10548 in a non-triggered position. Figure 86 illustrates transmission 10502 in a configuration that is consistent with the configuration of end actuator 10505 depicted in Figure 85. More particularly, slide gear 10516 is in its null or idle position, and is not operatively engaged with a drive shaft. close drive 10530 closure or trip trigger axis 10540. When the slide gear 10516 is in its inactive position, the slide gear 10516 is positioned intermediate a closing gear 10532 mounted and/or keyed to the closing shaft 10530 and a triggering gear 10542 mounted and/or keyed to the triggering shaft 10540 Also, the slide gear 10516 is not engaged with the close gear 10532 or the trigger gear 10542 when the slide gear 10516 is in the inactive position. In order to move anvil 10508 to its open position, and/or separate anvil 10508 from end actuator 10505, as illustrated in Figure 88, input shaft 10510 can be rotated in direction A, as illustrated in Figure 89. As discussed above, rotation of input shaft 10510 in direction A can rotate idler shaft 10520 in direction B and move displacer block 10526 proximally. When displacer block 10526 moves proximally, displacer block 10526 can push sliding gear 10516 into operative engagement with closing gear 10532. At such a point, continued rotation of input shaft 10510 in direction A can be transmitted to input shaft 10526. lock 10530 through meshed engagement of slip gear 10516 and lock gear 10532. When slip gear 10516 is in mesh engagement with lock gear 10532, rotation of input shaft 10510 in direction A will rotate output shaft 10530 in direction C, as illustrated in Figure 89. The lock driver may further include a lock nut 10536 comprising a threaded opening 10537 defined therein, which is threadedly engaged with a threaded portion 10534 of the lock shaft 10530. The nut 10536 may include one or more anti-rotation features slidably engaged with the instrument frame c for example, which can prevent the lock nut 10536 from rotating with the lock axis 10530 so that the rotational movement of the lock axis 10530 can be converted into a longitudinal movement of the lock nut 10536. The lock system can further include a lock member 10538 extending from lock nut 10536 that can be engaged with anvil 10508. When lock shaft 10530 is rotated in direction C, referring again to Figure 89, lock nut 10536 and closing member 10538 may be advanced distally to move anvil 10508 to an open position.

[0318] In addition to the above, Figure 89 illustrates the transmission 10502 in a closing configuration, that is, a configuration in which the anvil 10508 can be opened and closed. When sliding gear 10516 is in mesh engagement with closing gear 10532, input shaft 10510 will directly drive closing shaft 10530. Simultaneously, input shaft 10510 will directly drive idler shaft 10520 due to meshing engagement between the input gear 10512 and idler gear 10522. Also, when sliding gear 10516 is in mesh engagement with closing gear 10532, sliding gear 10516 is not in meshing engagement with triggering gear 10542 and as such the input shaft 10510 will not drive trigger shaft 10540 when transmission 10502 is in the close configuration.

[0319] Once the anvil 10508 has been moved to an open position and/or detached from the closing member 10538, in addition to the above, the tissue can be positioned between the anvil 10508 and the staple cartridge 10506. Next , still referring to Figures 90 and 91, the anvil 10508 can be moved to its closed position by rotating the input shaft 10510 in an opposite direction, i.e. direction A', which will rotate the closing shaft 10530 in an opposite direction, i.e., the C' direction, in order to move the lock nut 10536, the lock member 10538, and the anvil 10508 proximally. Input shaft 10510 will also rotate idler shaft 10520 in an opposite direction, i.e. B' direction, when input shaft 10510 is rotated in A' direction. When idler shaft 10520 is rotated in direction B', idler shaft 10520 will displace displacer block 10526 and slider gear 10516 distally. The displacer block 10526 can push the sliding gear 10516 distally until the sliding gear 10516 is no longer in mesh with the closing gear 10532 and the sliding gear 10516 has been returned to its inactive position. Further rotation of idler shaft 10520 in direction B" will cause displacer block 10526 to displace slide gear 10516 distally until slide gear 10516 is in meshed engagement with trigger gear 10542. At that point, referring to the Figures 92 and 93, input shaft 10510 can directly drive trigger shaft 10540. Then input shaft 10510 can rotate trigger shaft 10540 in D' direction, when input shaft 10510 is rotated in A' direction . The trigger system may further comprise a trigger nut 10546 including a threaded opening 10547 which is threadedly engaged with a threaded portion 10544 of the trigger shaft 10540. When the trigger shaft 10410 is rotated in the A' direction, the trigger shaft 10540 trigger 10540 can advance trigger nut 10546 distally. The trigger nut 10546 may include one or more anti-rotation features that can be slidably engaged with the surgical instrument frame so that the trigger nut 10546 does not rotate with the trigger axis 10540, and so that rotational movement of the firing shaft 10540 can be converted to longitudinal movement of the firing nut 10546. The firing driver may further include a firing member 10548 that extends from the firing nut 10546, which is advanced distally to eject the clips from the firing cartridge. clamps 10506. Over the entire firing stroke of the firing system, displacer block 10526 may continue to advance slide gear 10516 distally. The firing stroke may be completed when the displacer block 10526 advances the sliding gear 10516 distally to the point where the sliding gear 10516 is no longer threadedly engaged with the firing gear 10542. At this point, the firing member 10548 may be in its fully fired position.

[0320] In addition to the above, Figure 93 shows the transmission 10502 in a trigger configuration, i.e., a configuration where the trigger member 10548 can be advanced or retracted. When sliding gear 10516 is in meshed engagement with trigger gear 10542, input shaft 10510 will directly drive trigger shaft 10540. Simultaneously, input shaft 10510 will directly drive idler shaft 10520 due to meshing engagement between input gear 10512 and idler gear 10522. Also, when sliding gear 10516 is in mesh engagement with trigger gear 10542, sliding gear 10516 is not in mesh engagement with closing gear 10532 and, as such, the input shaft 10510 will not drive close shaft 10530 when transmission 10502 is in trigger configuration.

[0321] In order to remove trigger member 10548, input shaft 10510 can be rotated in direction A to rotate idler shaft 10520 in direction B, displace displacer block 10526 proximally, and re-engage slide gear 10516 with gear 10542. At such a point, continued rotation of input shaft 10510 in direction A will rotate trigger shaft 10540 in a direction opposite to direction D', displace trigger nut 10546 proximally, and retract trigger member 10548 As the slide gear 10516 is rotating the trigger gear 10542, the displacer block 10526 may continue to pull the slide gear 10516 proximally until the slide gear 10516 is no longer in mesh with the trigger gear 10542 and the gear slider 10516 reaches its inactive position. At such a point, continued rotation of input shaft 10510 in direction A will continue to displace displacer block 10526 and slide gear 10516 proximally and re-engage slide gear 10516 with closing gear 10532 in order to reopen anvil 10508.

[0322] Figures 94-98 illustrate a surgical instrument 11010 configured to staple and/or cut tissue. Surgical instrument 11010 may include a pistol grip handle 11015. Handle 11015 includes a first handle portion 11020 that defines a longitudinal axis 11030 from which jaws 11070 and 11090 can extend. Handle 11015 includes a second handle portion, i.e. handle grip 11040, which defines a second shaft portion 11050. Second shaft portion 11050 defines an angle 11060 with longitudinal axis 11030. In various cases, angle 11060 may comprise any suitable angle, such as about 120 degrees, for example. The gripper 11070 may comprise a cartridge channel including an opening configured to releasably receive a staple cartridge 11080. The staple cartridge 11080 may include a plurality of staples removably stored within the staple cavities arranged in at least two longitudinal rows, one on each side of a channel through which a tissue sectioning blade can travel, as described in more detail below. In at least one example, three longitudinal rows of staple cavities may be disposed on a first side of the blade channel, while three longitudinal rows of staple cavities may be disposed on a second side of the blade channel. Jaw 11090 may comprise an anvil rotatable to a position opposite and aligned with staple cartridge 11080 such that anvil pockets defined in anvil 11090 can receive and form staples ejected from staple cartridge 11080. Figure 98 shows anvil 11090 in an open position, while Figure 94 shows anvil 11090 in a closed position. Although not illustrated, other embodiments are envisaged in which the gripper including the staple cartridge 11080 is rotatable with respect to the anvil 11090. In any case, as will be described in more detail below, the handle 11015 may further include a closing button 11065 (Figure 98) configured to operate a closing system that moves the 11090 anvil between its open and closed positions and a 11055 firing button configured to operate a firing system that ejects staples from the 11080 staple cartridge. The closing button 11065 can be positioned and arranged on handle 11015 so that it can be easily accessed by the thumb of the operator's hand supporting handle 11015, for example, while fire button 11055 can be positioned and arranged so that it can be easily accessed by the operator cable's index finger supporting the 11015 cable.

[0323] In addition to the above, the anvil 11090 can be moved towards and away from the staple cartridge 11080 during use. In many cases, the 11065 close button may include a two-way switch. When the closing button 11065 is pressed in a first direction, the closing system of the surgical instrument 11010 can move the anvil 11090 to the staple cartridge 11080, and when the closing button 11065 is pressed in a second direction, the closing system The closure may move the anvil 11090 out of the staple cartridge 11080. Referring primarily to Figures 95 and 97, the closure system may include a closure motor 11110 configured to move the anvil 11090. The closure motor 11110 may include a pivot lock shaft 11130 extending therefrom to which a first lock gear 11140 can be affixed. The closing motor 11110 can rotate the closing shaft 11130 and the closing shaft 11130 can turn the first closing gear 11140. The first closing gear 11140 can be in mesh with a pulley gear 11150, which in turn , may be in meshed engagement with a closing drive screw drive gear 11160. The closing drive screw drive gear 11160 is attached to a closing drive screw 11170. When the first closing drive gear 11140 is rotated By the lock shaft 11130, the first lock gear 11140 can rotate the pulley gear 11150, the pulley gear 11150 can rotate the lock drive screw drive gear 11160, and the lock drive screw drive gear 11160 can turn the 11170 closing drive screw.

[0324] Mainly referring to Figure 97, the lock shaft 11130, the first lock gear 11140, the pulley gear 11150, and the lock drive screw drive gear 11160 can be pivotally supported by a locking block. motor 11125 supported within cable portion 11120. Closing drive screw 11170 may include a first end which is also pivotally supported by engine block 11125 and/or a second end which is pivotally supported by cable housing 11015. Closing drive screw 11170 may further comprise a threaded portion between the first end and the second end. The closure system may further comprise a closure block 11175 (Figure 96), which may include a threaded opening 11176, which is threadedly engaged with the threaded portion of the closure drive screw 11170. The closure block 11175 may be restricted. to turn with the Closing Drive Screw 11170 so that when the Closing Drive Screw 11170 is turned, the Closing Drive Screw 11170 can displace the Closing Block 11175 proximally or distally, depending on the direction in which the bolt closing trigger 11170 is being rotated. For example, if the closing drive screw 11170 is turned in a first direction, the closing drive screw 11170 can displace the closing drive block 11175 distally, and when the closing drive screw 11170 is turned in a second direction, or opposite direction, lock drive screw 11170 can displace lock block 11175 proximally. Referring primarily to Figure 96, the closure block 11175 can be mounted to a closure channel-shaped latch member 11180, which translates along the exterior of the cartridge channel 11170. In many cases, the closure channel 11180 may be placed within the cable portion 11120 while, in some cases, the closure channel 11180 may project from the cable portion 11120. The closure channel 11180 may comprise a "U" shaped channel. approximately when viewed from the end and may include opposing sidewalls 11182. Each sidewall 11182 may include a cam slot 11190 defined therein. As described in more detail below, cam slots 11190 can be configured to engage anvil 11090 and move anvil 11090 relative to staple cartridge 11080.

[0325] In addition to the above, the closure channel 11180 fits around the cartridge channel 11070 so that the cartridge channel 11070 nestles within the "U" shaped closure channel 11180. 96, cartridge channel 11070 may include elongate slots 11195 defined therein and closure channel 11180 may include pins that extend into elongate slots 11195. Closing channel pins and elongated slots 11195 may restrict the closing movement of channel 11180 so that closing channel 11180 translates relative to cartridge channel 11070 along a longitudinal path. The translational movement of the closing channel 11180 can rotate the anvil 11090. The anvil 11090 can be connected to the closing channel 11180 by means of a distal closing pin 11210 which extends through the anvil cam holes 11211 defined in the anvil 11090 and cam slots 11190 defined in closure channel 11180. Each cam slot 11190 may include a first end, or distal end 11191 and a second end, or proximal end 11192. Each cam slot 11190 may further include a first locking surface. drive, or proximal drive surface 11193, and a second drive surface, or distal drive surface 11194. When the closure system is in its open configuration and the anvil 11090 is in its open position, the closure channel 11180 may be in its first or non-advanced position, and the Distal Closure Pin 11210 may be at the first end, or distal end. such 11191 of the cam slots 11190. When the lock channel 11180 is advanced distally to move the anvil 11090 towards the staple cartridge 11080, the first driving surface 11193 can contact the distal lock pin 11210 and push the pin distal closure 11210 downwards towards the staple cartridge 11080. When the closure system is in its closed configuration and the anvil 11090 is in its closed position opposite the staple cartridge 11080, the closure channel 11180 may be in its second position, or fully advanced position, and distal locking pin 11210 may be at second, proximal ends 11192 of cam slots 11190.

[0326] Each cam slot 11190 may comprise a curved or arcuate path. First drive surface 11193 may comprise a first arcuate surface and second drive surface 11194 may comprise a second arcuate surface. In various cases, each cam slot 11190 may include at least one curved portion and at least one linear portion. In at least one instance, each first drive surface 11193 may comprise a flat surface at a distal end 11191 of a cam slot 11190. The flat surface may comprise a vertical surface that is perpendicular to, or at least substantially perpendicular to, the longitudinal axis 11030 of instrument 11010. This flat surface may act as a detent which may require an initial amount of force to move the locking pin 11210 into the arcuate portion of the cam slot 11190. In at least one case, each first locking surface drive 11193 may comprise a flat surface 11196 at a proximal end 11192 of a cam slot 11190. Flat surface 11196 may comprise a horizontal surface that is parallel to, or at least substantially parallel to, the longitudinal axis 11030. flat 11196 can provide a great mechanical advantage between the closing channel 11180 and the anvil 11090. In many cases s, the first drive surface 11193 can apply very little mechanical advantage to the lock pin 11210 when the lock pin 11210 is at the distal ends 11191 of the slots 11190; however, as lock pin 11210 slides along cam slots 11190 towards proximal ends 11192, the mechanical advantage applied to lock pin 11210 by first driving surfaces 11193 may increase. When the locking pin 11210 enters the proximal ends 11192, the mechanical advantage applied by the first driving surfaces 11193 may be greater than, and certainly greater than, the mechanical advantage applied by the first driving surfaces 11193 when the locking pin 11210 is at the distal ends 11191 of cam slots 11190. That said, when distal ends 11191 can apply a lesser mechanical advantage to lock pin 11210, distal ends 11191 can quickly displace lock pin 11210 with respect to cartridge 11080. the closing channel 11180 is advanced distally and the mechanical advantage applied to the closing pin 11210 increases, as discussed above, the first driving surfaces 11193 can move the anvil 11090 more slowly for a given speed of the closing channel 11180.

[0327] As illustrated in Figure 96, cartridge channel 11070 may further include distal closure slots 11215 defined therein which may be configured to receive distal closure pin 11210 as anvil 11090 approaches its closed position. Distal closure slots 11215 are substantially vertical and may include open ends at the top of cartridge channel 11070 and closed ends at opposite ends thereof. Slots 11215 may be wider at their open ends than at their closed ends. In various cases, closure pin 11210 may contact closed ends of closure slots 11090 when anvil 11215 reaches its closed position. In such cases, the closed ends of the closing slots 11215 can stop the anvil 11090 from moving. In certain cases, the anvil 11090 can contact the staple cartridge 11080 when the anvil 11090 is in its closed position. In at least one example, anvil 11090 can be rotated about pivot pin 11200 until a distal end 11091 of anvil 11090 contacts a distal end 11081 of staple cartridge 11080. As illustrated in Figure 98, the locking pin 11210 that moves anvil 11090 is positioned distally with respect to pivot pin 11220. Thus, the closing force applied to anvil 11090 by the closing driver is applied distally with respect to the pivot that pivotally connects anvil 11090 to cartridge channel 11070 Thus, the opening force applied to the anvil 11090 by the closing driver is applied distally with respect to the pivot pivotally connecting the anvil 11090 to the cartridge channel 11070.

[0328] As discussed above, cable 11015 may include a closure button 11065 configured to operate the closure system of surgical instrument 11010. Movement of closure button 11065 may be detected by a sensor or a switch, for example. When the closing button 11065 is pressed, a closing switch 11285 can be activated, or closed, which causes power to flow to the closing motor 11110. In such cases, the switch 11285 can close a power circuit that can provide electrical power to the closing motor 11110. In certain cases, the surgical instrument 11010 may include a microprocessor, for example. In such cases, the closing switch 11285 may be in signal communication with the microprocessor, and when the closing switch 11285 is closed, the microprocessor may operatively connect a power source to the closing motor 11110. In either case, a The first voltage polarity can be applied to the closing motor 11110 to rotate the closing output shaft 11130 in a first direction and closing the anvil 11090, and further, a second voltage polarity, or opposite voltage polarity, can be applied to the closing motor 11110 to rotate the closing output shaft 11130 in a second or opposite direction and opening the anvil 11090.

[0329] In various cases, the surgical instrument 11010 may be configured so that the operator of the surgical instrument 11010 is required to hold the close button 11065 in a pressed state until the close trigger has reached its fully closed setting. In the event that the closing button 11065 is released, the microprocessor can stop the closing motor 11110. Alternatively, the microprocessor can reverse the direction of the closing motor 11110 if the closing button 11065 is released before the closing trigger reaches its completely closed configuration. After the closure trigger has reached its fully closed configuration, the microprocessor may stop the closure motor 11110. In various cases, as described in more detail below, the surgical instrument 11010 may comprise a closure sensor 11300 (Figures 96 and 98) configured to detect when the closing system has reached its fully closed configuration. Closing sensor 11300 may be in signal communication with the microprocessor which can disconnect power supply from the closing motor 11110 when the microprocessor receives a signal from the closing sensor 11300 that the anvil 11090 has closed. In many cases, pressing the closing button 11065 again after the closing system has been placed in its closed configuration, but before the trip system has been operated, can cause the microprocessor to reverse the direction of the closing motor. closing 11110 and reopening anvil 11090. In certain cases, the microprocessor may re-open anvil 11090 to its fully open position, while in other cases, the microprocessor may re-open anvil 11090 to a partially open position.

[0330] Once the anvil 11090 has been sufficiently closed, the trigger system of the surgical instrument 11010 can be operated. Referring primarily to Figures 95 and 97, the triggering system may include a triggering motor 11120. The triggering motor 11120 may be positioned adjacent to the closing motor 11110. The closing motor 11110 may extend along a first longitudinal axis of the motor and firing motor 11120 may extend along a second longitudinal axis of the motor that is parallel, or at least substantially parallel to the first axis of the motor. The first longitudinal axis of the motor and the second longitudinal axis of the motor can be parallel to the longitudinal axis 11030 of the surgical instrument 11010. The closing motor 11110 can be positioned on a first side of the longitudinal axis 11030 and the trigger motor 11120 can be positioned on a second side of the longitudinal axis 11030. In such cases, the first longitudinal axis of the motor may extend along a first side of the longitudinal axis 11030 and the second longitudinal axis of the motor may extend along a second side of the axis longitudinal axis 11030. In various cases, the first longitudinal axis of the motor may extend through the center of the lock axis 11130. Similar to the above, the firing motor 11120 may include a rotatable firing axis 11230 extending therefrom. Also similarly to above, the second longitudinal axis of the motor can extend through the center of the firing axis 11230.

[0331] In addition to the above, a first trigger gear 11240 can be mounted on the trigger shaft 11230. The first trigger gear 11240 is in meshed engagement with a trigger screw drive gear 11250 that is mounted on a 11260 trigger drive screw. When 11230 trigger shaft is rotated by 11120 motor, 11230 trigger shaft can rotate 11240 first trigger gear, 11240 first trigger gear can rotate 11250 trigger screw drive gear , the triggering screw drive gear 11250 can rotate the triggering screw 11260. Mainly referring to Figure 97, the trigger shaft 11230, the first trigger gear 11240, the trigger screw drive gear 11230 11250 trigger drive, and/or the 11260 trigger screw can be pivotally supported by the 11125 engine block. 11240 trigger gear and 11250 trigger screw drive gear can be positioned between engine block 11125 and a first block plate 11126. The first block plate 11126 can be mounted to engine block 11125 and can also be pivotally supporting the trigger shaft 11230, the first trigger gear 11240, the trigger screw drive gear 11250, and/or the trigger drive screw 11260. In various cases, the surgical instrument 11010 may further comprise a second block plate 11127, which can be mounted on the first block plate 11126. Similar to the above, the first lock gear 11140, the pulley gear 11150, and the lock drive screw drive gear 11160 can be positioned intermediate blocks to the first block plate 11126 and the second block plate 11127. In many cases, the first block plate 11126 and/or the second block plate 11126 and/or the second block plate 11126 loco 11127 can pivotally support lock shaft 11130, first lock gear 11140, pulley gear 11150, lock drive screw drive gear 11160, and/or lock drive screw 11170.

[0332] The motor and gear arrangement described above can assist in maintaining the space within the handle 11015 of the surgical instrument 11010. As discussed above, and with reference to Figure 97, the closing motor 11110 and the triggering motor 11120 are located in the engine block of the 11125 engine. The 11110 shut-off engine is located to one side and slightly proximal to the 11120 tripping engine. Moving one engine proximally from another creates space for two gear trains with a gears after another. For example, the lock gear train comprising first lock gear 11140, lock pulley gear 11150, and lock drive screw drive gear 11160 is proximal to the trigger gear train comprising first gear 11240 and the 11250 trigger screw drive gear. Having motor shafts extending proximally away from the jaws, with the main body of the motor extending distally towards the jaw, creates space in the 11015 handle. and a shorter cable 11015 is allowed to have the main body of motors 11110 and 11120 aligned parallel to the side of other parts within the cable 11015.

[0333] In addition to the above, the closing and firing gear trains are designed for space conservation. In the embodiment shown in Figure 97, the closing motor 11110 drives three gears, while the triggering motor 11120 drives two gears; however, the closing gear train and the triggering gear train may include any suitable number of gears. The addition of a third gear, i.e. the closing pulley gear 11150, to the closing gear train allows the closing drive screw 11170 to be shifted down relative to the triggering drive screw 11260 so that separate drive screws can rotate around different axes. In addition, the third gear eliminates the need for larger diameter gears to shift the drive screw shafts so that the overall diameter of the space required for gear trains, and the volume of the 11015 cable, can be reduced.

[0334] Referring mainly to Figure 98, the closing drive screw 11170 can extend along a first axis of the longitudinal axis and the firing drive bolt 11260 can extend along a second axis of the longitudinal axis. longitudinal axis. The first axis of the longitudinal axis and the second axis of the longitudinal axis may be parallel to the longitudinal axis 11030 of the surgical instrument 11010. The first axis of the longitudinal axis and the second axis of the longitudinal axis may be collinear with the longitudinal axis 11030. In various cases, the firing drive screw 11260 may extend along the longitudinal axis 11030 and the second axis of the longitudinal axis may be collinear with the longitudinal axis 11030. In such cases, the closing drive screw 11170 and the first axis of the longitudinal axis can be offset with respect to the longitudinal axis 11030.

[0335] In addition to the above, the firing drive screw 11260 may include a first end pivotally supported by engine block 11125, for example, a second end pivotally supported by handle 11015, and a threaded portion extending between the first end and the second end. The trigger trigger bolt 11260 may reside within the "U" shape of the cartridge channel 11070 and above the lock trigger screw 11170. Referring primarily to Figure 95, the trigger trigger may further comprise a trigger block. trigger 11265 which may include a threaded opening 11266 threadedly engaged with the threaded portion of the triggering screw 11260. The triggering block 11265 may be restricted from rotating with the triggering screw 11260 so that rotation of the triggering screw 11265 11260 trigger drive can translate 11265 trigger block proximally or distally, depending on which direction 11260 trigger drive screw is rotated by 11120 trigger motor. For example, when 11260 trigger drive screw is rotated in a In the first direction, the 11260 triggering screw can displace the 11265 triggering block distally, and when the d triggering screw trigger 11260 is rotated in a second direction, trigger trigger bolt 11260 can displace trigger block 11265 proximally. As described in more detail below, the firing block 11265 can be advanced distally to detachably deploy staples stored in the staple cartridge 11080 and/or cut the captured tissue between the staple cartridge 11080 and the anvil 11090.

[0336] In addition to the above, the firing block 11265 may be affixed to a thruster block 11270 so that the thruster block 11270 translates with the firing block 11265. The firing system may further include firing wedges 11280 which are attached to, and extending distally from, drive block 11270. Firing wedges 11280 may each include at least one cam surface at their distal end that is configurable to eject staples from staple cartridge 11080. The firing system may further comprise a blade block 11281 slidably disposed along the firing wedges 11280. In several cases, the initial distal movement of the firing block 11265 cannot be transferred to the blade block 11215; however, as firing block 11265 is advanced distally, thruster block 11270, for example, may contact blade block 11215 and push blade block 11215 and a blade 11282 mounted distally thereon. In other cases, the blade block 11215 may be mounted to the firing wedges 11280 so that the blade block 11281 and the blade 11282 move with the firing wedges 11280 along the movement of the firing wedges 11280. trigger 11265, thruster block 11270, triggering wedges 11280, blade block 11215, and blade 11282 can form a thruster block and blade assembly. In either case, the firing wedges 11280 and the blade 11282 can be moved distally to fire the staples stored within the staple cartridge 11080 simultaneously and cut the tissue captured between the staple cartridge 11080 and the anvil 11090. The cam surfaces of the firing wedges 11280 can be positioned distally with respect to the cutting surface of the blade 11282 so that the tissue captured between the staple cartridge 11080 and the anvil 11090 can be stapled before being cut.

[0337] As discussed above, the closing button 11065, when pressed, contacts the closing switch 11285 to energize the closing motor 11110. Similarly, the triggering button 11055, when pressed, makes contact with a 11290 trip switch to power the 11120 trip motor. In many cases, the 11290 trip switch may close a power circuit that can supply electrical power to the 11120 trip motor. In certain cases, the 11290 trip switch may be in signal communication with the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 11010, and when the trigger switch 11290 is closed, the microprocessor may operatively connect a power source to the trigger motor 11120. In either case, a first voltage polarity may be applied to the trigger motor 11120 to rotate the trigger output shaft 11230 in a first direction and advance the trigger assembly distally and a second voltage polarity, or polar opposite voltage age, can be applied to the 11120 trigger motor to rotate the 11230 trigger output shaft in a second or opposite direction and retract the trigger assembly. In many cases, the 11055 fire button may include a two-way switch configured to operate the 11120 fire motor in its first direction when the 11055 fire button is pushed in a first direction, and in its second direction when the fire button is pushed. 11055 is pushed in a second direction.

[0338] As discussed above, the triggering system can be triggered after the closing system has sufficiently closed the anvil 11090. In various cases, the anvil 11090 can be sufficiently closed when it has reached its fully closed position. The surgical instrument 11010 can be configured to detect when the anvil 11090 has reached its fully closed position. Referring primarily to Figure 98, the surgical instrument 11010 may include a closing sensor 11300 configured to detect when the closing channel 11180 has reached the end of its closing stroke and thereby detecting when the anvil 11090 is in its position. closed. The closure sensor 11300 may be positioned at, or adjacent to, the distal end of the closure drive screw 11170. In at least one instance, the closure sensor 11300 may comprise a proximity sensor configured to detect when the closure channel 11180 is adjacent to and/or is in contact with the closure sensor 11300. Similar to the above, the closure sensor 11300 may be in signal communication with the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 11010. When the microprocessor receives a signal from the closure sensor 11010 closing 11300 that the closing channel 11180 has reached its fully forward position and the anvil 11090 is in a closed position, the microprocessor can allow the triggering system to be triggered. Furthermore, the microprocessor may prevent the tripping system from being triggered until the microprocessor receives such a signal from the close sensor 11300. In such cases, the microprocessor may selectively apply power from a power source to the motor. trigger 11120, or selectively control the power being applied to the 11120 trigger motor, based on the input from the 11300 close sensor. Finally, in these modes, the 11290 trip switch cannot initiate the trip stroke until the instrument is closed .

[0339] Certain embodiments are provided where the 11010 surgical instrument triggering system may be used even if the closing system is in a partially closed configuration and the anvil 11090 is in a partially closed position. In at least one embodiment, the surgical instrument trigger assembly 11010 may be configured to contact the anvil 11090 and move the anvil 11090 to its fully closed position as the trigger assembly is advanced distally to trigger the staples stored in the staple cartridge 11080. For example, blade 11282 may include a cam member configured to engage anvil 11090 when blade 11282 is distally advanced which can move anvil 11090 to its fully closed position. Blade 11282 may also include a second cam member configured to engage cartridge channel 11070. Cam members may be configured to position anvil 11090 with respect to staple cartridge 11080 and define a gap distance between tissue. In at least one instance, the blade 11282 may comprise an I-profile beam, which is offset in the distal direction to adjust the gap between the fabric, eject the staples from the staple cartridge 11080, and cut the tissue.

[0340] The 11010 surgical instrument may have a sensor configured to detect when the trigger system has completed its trigger stroke. In at least one example, the surgical instrument 11010 may include a sensor, such as a decoder, for example, which may be configured to detect and count the rotations of the trigger screw 11260. Such a sensor may be in signal communication with the microprocessor. of the 11010 surgical instrument. The microprocessor can be configured to count the rotations of the 11260 trigger drive screw, and after the 11260 trigger drive screw has been rotated a sufficient number of times to trigger all the staples of the 11080 staple cartridge, the microprocessor may interrupt power supplied to the 11120 trigger motor to stop the 11260 trigger drive screw. In certain cases, the microprocessor may reverse the polarity of the voltage applied to the 11120 trigger motor to automatically retract the trigger assembly once the firing set has fired all of the staples.

[0341] As discussed above, the surgical instrument 11010 may include a power supply. The power supply may include a power supply located external to cable 11015 and a lead cable which may extend into cable 11015, for example. The power supply may include at least one battery contained within the cable 11015. A battery may be positioned in the first cable portion 11020 and/or the cable grip 11040. It is envisaged that the batteries, gears, motors, and shafts of rotation can all be combined in a unit separable from the rest of the handle 11015. Such a unit can be cleaned and sterilized.

[0342] In various cases, the surgical instrument 11010 may include one or more indicators configured to indicate the status of the surgical instrument 11010. In at least one embodiment, the surgical instrument 11010 may include an LED 11100, for example. To communicate the status of the surgical instrument to the user, the LED 11100 can light up in different colors during different operating states of the surgical instrument 11010. For example, the LED 11100 can light a first color when the surgical instrument 11010 is energized, and a cartridge 11080 unspent staple cartridge is not positioned in the 11070 cartridge channel. The 11010 surgical instrument may include one or more sensors, which can be configured to detect whether a 11080 staple cartridge is present in the 11070 cartridge channel and whether the staples have been ejected from staple cartridge 11080. For example, LED 11100 can light a second color when surgical instrument 11010 is energized, and an unspent staple cartridge 11080 is positioned in cartridge channel 11070. LED 11010 can light a third color when surgical instrument 11010 is energized, and an unspent staple cartridge 11080 is loaded in cartridge channel 11070, and the anvil 11090 is in the closed position. This third color may indicate that the 11010 surgical instrument is ready to fire staples from the 11080 staple cartridge. The 11100 LED may light the fourth color after the firing process has started. The 11100 LED can light up to the fifth color after the triggering process has been completed. This is just an example modality. Any suitable number of colors can be used to indicate any suitable number of states of the 11010 surgical instrument. Although one or more LEDs can be used to communicate the state of the surgical instrument, other indicators can be used.

[0343] In use, a user of surgical instrument 11010 may first load surgical instrument 11010 with a staple cartridge 11080 by placing the staple cartridge 11080 in cartridge channel 11070. Loading cartridge 11080 into cartridge channel 11070 can do causing the 11100 LED to change from a first color to a second color. The user may grasp the cable grip 11040 and use the thumb activated lock key 11065 to open the anvil 11090 of the surgical instrument 11010 in order to place the staple cartridge 11080 into the cartridge channel 11070. then, position the staple cartridge 11080 on one side of the fabric to be stapled and subjected to transection and the anvil 11090 on the opposite side of the fabric. By holding the closing button with the thumb 11065, the user can close the 11010 surgical instrument. Releasing the closing button 11065 before the closing stroke is completed can reopen the 11090 anvil and allow the user to reposition the 11010 surgical instrument, if necessary. required. The user can enjoy the benefit of being able to use an open linear cutter with pivoting jaws, without the need to assemble linear cutter portions. The user can further enjoy the advantage of a pistol grip feel.

[0344] As the anvil 11090 is being moved to its fully closed position, the closing channel 11080 can contact the closing sensor 11300, and the closing sensor 11300 can signal the microprocessor to arm the trip switch 11290. In At that point, the 11100 LED lights a third color to show a 11010 surgical instrument loaded, closed, and ready to fire. The user can then press the 11055 trigger button which contacts the 11290 trigger switch and causes the 11290 trigger switch to energize the 11120 trigger motor. which in turn rotates the first trigger gear 11240 and the trigger screw drive gear 11250. The trigger screw drive gear 11250 rotates the trigger screw 11260. The screw threads trigger blocks 11260 engage and apply a force against the internal threads defined in trigger block 11265 to move trigger block 11265 distally. Firing block 11265 moves pusher block 11270 distally, carrying firing wedges 11280 distally. The cam surfaces 11305 at the distal end of the cam clamps of the firing wedges 11280 stored within the staple cartridge 11080 go toward the anvil 11090, and the anvil 11090 can form the staples for securing the tissue. Pusher block 11270 engages blade block 11281 to push blade block 11215 and blade 11282 distally to perform stapled tissue transection. After the firing stroke has been completed, the firing motor 11120 can be inverted to return the impeller block 11270, the blade block 11215, the firing wedges 11280, and the blade 11282. The surgical instrument 11010 may include a button and /or switch, which automatically instructs the microprocessor to retract the firing assembly, even if the firing stroke has not yet been completed. In some cases, the trigger assembly may not need to be retracted. In either case, the user can open the surgical instrument 11010 by pressing the closing button 11065. The closing button 11065 can contact the closing switch 11285 and energizing the closing motor 11110. The closing motor 11110 can be operated in a reverse direction to retract the closing channel 11180 proximally to reopen the anvil 11090 of the surgical instrument 11010. The LED 11100 can light the fourth color which designates a firing cartridge, and a complete procedure.

[0345] A surgical stapling instrument 12010 is depicted in Figures 99-106. The instrument 12010 may include a handle 12015, a closing trigger including a closing latch 12050 configured to compress tissue between a staple cartridge 12080 and an anvil 12090, and a triggering trigger configured to eject staples from the staple cartridge 12080 and cut the fabric. Figure 99 shows the 12010 instrument in an open, unlocked condition. When the instrument 12010 is in its unlocked, open condition, the anvil 12090 is pivoted away from the staple cartridge 12080. In various cases, the anvil 12090 may pivot relative to the staple cartridge 12080 through a wide angle so that that the anvil 12090 and staple cartridge 12080 can be easily positioned on opposite sides of the fabric. Figure 100 shows the 12010 instrument in a closed, unlocked condition. When the instrument 12010 is in its closed, unlocked condition, the anvil 12090 is rotated toward the staple cartridge 12080 to a closed position opposite the staple cartridge 12080. In many cases, the closed position of the anvil 12090 may depend on the thickness of the tissue positioned between the anvil 12090 and the staple cartridge 12080. For example, the anvil 12090 may reach a closed position that is further away from the staple cartridge 12080 when the tissue positioned intermediate the anvil 12090 and the staple cartridge 12080 is more thicker compared to when the fabric is thinner. Figure 101 shows the 12010 instrument in a closed, locked condition. When the instrument 12010 is in its closed, locked condition, the anvil 12050 is rotated to engage the anvil 12090 and position the anvil 12090 with respect to the staple cartridge 12080. At that point, as described in more detail below, the driver 12010 surgical instrument trigger can be triggered to trigger the staples of the 12080 staple cartridge and cut tissue.

[0346] Referring primarily to Figure 106, the surgical instrument 12010 may include a frame 12020 extending from the handle 12015. The frame 12020 may include a frame channel 12022 defined therein, which may be configured to receive and/or or supporting a cartridge channel 12070. Cartridge channel 12070 may include a proximal end and a distal end. The proximal end of cartridge channel 12070 may be secured to frame 12020. The distal end of cartridge channel 12070 may be configured to releasably receive a staple cartridge 12080 therein. The frame channel 12022 may include pivot openings 12207 defined on opposite sides thereof. A pivot pin 12205 may be supported within pivot openings 12207 and may extend between the sides of channel 12022. Closing latch 12050 may include a latch structure 12051 comprising latch bars 12052. Latch bars 12052 may be pivotally mounted to frame 12020 via pivot pin 12205 which can extend through pivot openings 12206 defined in lock bars 12052. In many cases pivot openings 12206, 12207 and pivot pin 12205 can define an axis fixed 12208 on which the closing latch 12050 can rotate. Closing latch 12050 may further include a latch housing 12057 mounted to latch bars 12052. When latch housing 12057 is moved by the user of surgical instrument 12010, latch housing 12057 can move latch bars 12052. of the 12050 closing latch is described in more detail below.

[0347] In addition to the above, the anvil 12090 may include a proximal end and a distal end. The distal end of the anvil 12090 may include a plurality of staple forming pockets that are alignable, or registerable, with staple cavities defined in the staple cartridge 12080 when the anvil 12090 is in its closed position. The proximal end of anvil 12090 may be pivotally connected to frame 12020. Anvil 12090 may include a pivot aperture 12201 which may be aligned with pivot apertures 12202 defined in cartridge channel 12207 and a pivot aperture 12203 defined in frame 12020. A pivot pin 12200 can extend through pivot ports 12201, 12202, and 12203 and can pivotally connect anvil 12090 to cartridge channel 12207. In many cases, pivot ports 12201, 12202, and 12203 and pivot pin 12200 can define a fixed axis about which anvil 12090 can rotate. In certain cases, the pivot openings 12201, 12202 and/or 12203 may be longitudinally elongated, for example, so that the pivot pin 12200 can slide within the pivot openings 12201, 12202 and/or 12203. In such cases , anvil 12090 can rotate about an axis with respect to cartridge channel 12070 and further translate with respect to cartridge channel 12070. Anvil 12090 can further include an anvil housing 12097 mounted thereon. When the anvil housing 12097 is moved by the user of the surgical instrument 12010, the anvil housing 12097 can move the anvil 12090 so that the anvil 12090 can be rotated between an open position (Figure 99) and a closed position (Figure 100). .

[0348] In addition to the above, anvil 12090 may additionally include a latch pin 12210. Anvil 12090 may include latch pin openings 12211 and anvil housing 12097 may include latch pin openings 12212 which are configured to receive and support latch pin 12210. When anvil 12090 has been moved to its closed position, or a position adjacent to its closed position, latch 12050 may engage latch pin 12210 and pull anvil 12090 into the cartridge of clamps 12080. In various cases, the lock bars 12052 of the lock 12050 may include one lock arm each 12053 configured to engage the lock pin 12210. The lock 12050 may be rotated between an unlocked position (Figure 100), in which the 12053 lock arms are not engaged with the 12210 lock pin and a locked position (Figure 101). When the lock 12050 is moved between its unlocked position and its locked position, the lock arms 12053 can engage the lock pin 12210 and move the anvil 12090 to the staple cartridge 12080. Each lock arm 12053 may include a surface cam set to contact latch 12210. Cam surfaces can be set to push and guide latch pin 12210 to staple cartridge 12080. When latch 12050 has reached its locked position, latch pin 12210 can be captured within the latch slots 12054 defined in the latch bars 12052. The latch slots 12054 may be at least partially defined by the latch arms 12053. Opposite sides of the latch slots 12054 may include lifting surfaces that can be configured to engage lock pin 12210 and lift anvil 12090 away from staple cartridge 12080 when lock 12050 is rotated between its locked position and its unlocked position to open the 12010 instrument, as discussed in more detail below.

[0349] As discussed above, the anvil 12090 can be moved to the staple cartridge 12080. In many cases, the movement of the anvil 12090 toward the staple cartridge 12080 can be stopped when a distal end of the anvil 12090 comes into contact with a distal end of the staple cartridge 12080. In some cases, the movement of the anvil 12090 may be stopped when the lock pin 12210 contacts the cartridge channel 12070. The cartridge channel 12070 may include slots 12215 defined therein that are configured to receive latch pin 12210. Each slot 12215 may include an upwardly facing open end through which latch pin 12210 can enter slot 12215 and, in addition, a closed end. In various cases, lock pin 12210 may contact closed ends of slots 12215 when anvil 12090 reaches its closed position. In certain cases, the locking pin 12210 cannot contact the closed ends of the slots 12215 if thick tissue is positioned between the anvil 12090 and the staple cartridge 12080. In at least one example, the anvil 12090 may further include a locking pin. 12095. Locking pin 12095 may be mounted and supported by anvil 12090 through pin openings 12096 defined therein. Locking pin 12095 may be configured to contact cartridge channel 12070 and stop the movement of anvil 12090 towards staple cartridge 12080. Similar to the above, cartridge channel 12070 may further include locking slots 12075 defined therein, which may be configured to receive locking pin 12095. Each locking slot 12075 may include an upwardly facing open end through which locking pin 12095 can enter locking slot 12275 and, in addition, a closed end. In various cases, the locking pin 12095 may contact the closed ends of the locking slots 12075 when the anvil 12090 reaches its closed position. In certain cases, the locking pin 12095 cannot contact the closed ends of the locking slots 12075 if thick tissue is positioned between the anvil 12090 and the staple cartridge 12080.

[0350] As discussed above, cartridge channel 12070 may be mounted to frame 12020. In various cases, cartridge channel 12070 may be rigidly and fixedly mounted to frame 12020. In such cases, cartridge channel 12070 may not be movable relative to frame 12020 and/or handle 12015. In certain cases, cartridge channel 12070 may be pivotally coupled to frame 12020. In at least one such case, cartridge channel 12070 may include defined pivot openings 12202 in the same, which can be configured to receive pivot pin 12200. Under such circumstances, both anvil 12090 and cartridge channel 12070 can be swiveled relative to frame 12020 around pivot pin 12200. Latch 12050 can maintain anvil 12090 and cartridge channel 12070 in the position where latch 12050 is engaged with latch pin 12210.

[0351] In certain cases, in addition to the above, the 12010 instrument may include one or more sensors configured to detect whether the anvil 12090 is in its closed position. In at least one instance, the instrument 12010 may include a pressure sensor midway between the frame 12020 and the cartridge channel 12070. The pressure sensor may be mounted on the channel frame 12022 or at the bottom of the cartridge channel 12070 , for example. When the pressure sensor is mounted at the bottom of cartridge channel 12070, the pressure sensor can contact frame channel 12022 when cartridge channel 12070 is moved towards frame channel 12022. Cartridge channel 12070 can be moved toward frame channel 12022, if cartridge channel 12070 is rotatable with respect to frame channel 12022, as discussed above. In addition to, or instead of, the above, cartridge channel 12070 can be moved towards channel structure 12022 if cartridge channel 12070 flexes towards structure channel 12022. Cartridge channel 12070 can be flex towards frame channel 12022 when a compressive load is generated between anvil 12090 and cartridge channel 12070. A compressive load between anvil 12090 and cartridge channel 12070 can be generated when anvil 12090 is moved to its closed position, and/or when anvil 12090 is moved toward cartridge channel 12070 by latch 12050. When anvil 12090 is pushed toward cartridge channel 12070 and/or when latch 12050 is used to pull anvil 12090 towards cartridge channel 12070, cartridge channel 12070 may bear against pivot pin 12205. In various cases, cartridge channel 12070 may include a slot or groove 12209 defined therein, which may be configured to receive the pin 12205. In either case, the pressure sensor can be configured to sense the pressure or force being applied to the cartridge channel 12070. The pressure sensor can be in signal communication with a microprocessor of the 12010 surgical instrument. pressure or force sensed by the pressure sensor exceeds a threshold value, the microprocessor may allow the triggering system of the 12010 instrument to be operated. Before the pressure or force exceeds the threshold value, the microprocessor may warn the user of the surgical instrument 12010 that the anvil 12090 cannot be closed, or closed sufficiently, when the user attempts to operate the triggering system. In addition to or in lieu of such a warning, the microprocessor may prevent the instrument triggering system 12010 from being operated if the pressure or force sensed by the pressure sensor has not exceeded the threshold value.

[0352] In certain cases, in addition to the above, the 12010 instrument may include one or more sensors configured to detect whether the 12050 lock is in its locked position. In at least one case, the instrument 12010 may include a sensor 12025 intermediate between the frame 12020 and the cartridge channel 12070. The sensor may be mounted on the channel frame 12022 or on the underside of the cartridge channel 12070, for example . When the 12025 sensor is mounted at the bottom of the 12070 cartridge channel, the 12050 latch can contact the 12025 sensor when the 12050 latch is moved from its unlocked position to its locked position. The 12015 sensor may be in signal communication with a microprocessor of the 12010 surgical instrument. When the sensor 12025 detects that the latch 12050 is in its locked position, the microprocessor may allow the triggering system of the 12010 instrument to be operated. Before the 12025 sensor detects that the 12050 lock is in its locked position, the microprocessor may warn the user of the 12010 surgical instrument that the 12090 anvil cannot be closed, or sufficiently closed, when the user attempts to operate the trigger system. In addition to, or in lieu of, such a warning, the microprocessor may prevent the instrument triggering system 12010 from being operated if the latch 12050 is not detected in its latched position. In various cases, sensor 12025 may comprise a proximity sensor, for example. In various cases, sensor 12025 may comprise a Hall effect sensor, for example. In at least one of these cases, the lock 12050 may include at least one magnetic element, such as a permanent magnet, for example, which can be detected by the Hall Effect sensor. In many cases, the 12025 sensor can be held in position by a 12026 bracket, for example.

[0353] Referring primarily to Figure 105, the triggering system of the surgical instrument 12010 may include a triggering motor 12120 configured to rotate a triggering shaft 12230. The triggering motor 12120 may be mounted to a motor frame 12125 in the interior of handle 12015 of surgical instrument 12010 so that trigger axis 12230 extends distally. The trigger system may further comprise a train of gears including, one, a first trigger gear 12240 mounted on the closing shaft 12230 and, two, a screw drive gear 12250 mounted on a screw drive 12260. 12240 trigger can be in meshed engagement with the 12250 drive screw gear so that when the 12240 first trigger gear is rotated by the 12230 trigger shaft, the 12240 first trigger gear can rotate 12250 drive screw gear and the drive screw gear 12250 can rotate drive screw 12260. Referring primarily to Figure 104, drive screw 12260 may comprise a first end 12261 rotatably mounted 12250 within an opening defined in engine block 12125 and a second end 12263 rotatably supported within a bearing mounted on a bearing portion 12264 of the cable 12015. The trigger bolt 12260 may further include a threaded portion 12262 between the first end 12261 and the second end 12263. The trigger system may further comprise a trigger nut 12265 threadedly engaged with a threaded portion 12262 of the trigger screw. drive 12260. Trigger nut 12265 can be restricted from turning with drive screw 12260 so that when drive screw 12260 is turned in a first direction by trigger motor 12120, drive screw 12260 can advance the nut trigger screw 12265 distally and correspondingly when trigger screw 12260 is rotated in a second or opposite direction by trigger motor 12120, trigger screw 12260 can retract trigger nut 12265 proximally.

[0354] In addition to the above, trip nut 12265 can be mounted on trip block 12270 which can translate with trip nut 12265. In various cases trip nut 12265 and trip block 12270 can be formed fully. Similar to the above, the trigger system above may also include trigger bars 12280 extending therefrom, which translate with the trigger nut 12265 and the trigger block 12270. In several cases, the trigger nut 12265, the trigger block 12270, and the trigger bars 12280 may comprise a trigger assembly that is translated proximally and/or distally by the trigger bolt 12160. When the trigger assembly is advanced distally by the trigger screw 12260, the trigger bars 12280 can enter the 12080 staple cartridge and eject the staples from it. The firing system may further comprise a blade block 12281 and a blade bar 12282 mounted on and extending from the blade block 12281. As the firing block 12270 is advanced distally, the firing bars 12280 may engage the block. blade 12281 and advancing blade block 12281 and blade bar 12282 distally. In various cases, firing block 12270 may move relative to blade block 12281 during the initial portion of the firing stroke and then moving together during the final portion of the firing stroke. In at least one of these cases, the firing bars 12280 may slide through the slots defined in the blade block 12281 until one or more raised surfaces extending from the firing bars 12280 contact the blade block 12281 and push the blade block 12281 distally with firing bars 12280. In various cases, the firing assembly may further include knife block 12281 and knife bar 12282, which can move simultaneously with firing block 12270 and firing bars 12280. In any event, as the blade bar is advanced distally 12282, a cutting edge 12283 of the blade bar 12282 can cut the tissue captured between the anvil 12090 and the staple cartridge 12080. US Patent Disclosure No. 4,633,874, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH JAW LATCHING MECHANISM AND DISPOSABLE LOADING CARTRIDGE, which was issued January 6, 1987, is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0355] Referring mainly to Figure 106, the trigger system of the surgical instrument 12010 may include a trigger button 12055 and a trigger switch 12290. When the user of the surgical instrument 12010 depresses the trigger button 12055, the trigger button 12055 trigger can contact the 12290 trigger switch and close a trigger circuit that can operate the 12120 trigger motor. When the user of the 12010 surgical instrument releases the 12055 trigger button, the trigger circuit can be opened and power supplied to the 12120 firing engine can be stopped. The 12055 trigger button can be pushed once more to operate the 12120 trigger motor once more. In certain cases, the trigger button 12055 may comprise a two-way switch which, when pushed in a first direction, can operate the trigger motor 12120 in a first direction and, when pushed in a second direction, can operate the trigger motor 12120 in a second, or opposite direction. The 12090 trigger switch and/or any suitable arrangement of trigger switches may be in signal communication with the 12010 surgical instrument microprocessor, which may be configured to control the power supplied to the 12120 trigger motor. In certain cases, in addition to the exposed above, the microprocessor may ignore signals from fire button 12025 until sensor 12055 detects that latch 12050 has closed. In either case, firing button 12055 can be pushed in its first direction to advance firing bars 12280 and blade 12282 distally and its second direction to retract firing bars 12280 and blade 12282 proximally. In certain cases, the 12010 surgical instrument may include a trigger button and switch configured to operate the 12120 trigger motor in its first direction and a retraction button and switch configured to operate the 12120 trigger motor in its second direction. After firing bars 12280 and blade 12282 have been retracted, latch 12050 can be moved from its locked position to its unlocked position to disengage latch arms 12053 from latch pin 12210. Next, anvil 12090 can be hinged away from the 12080 staple cartridge to return the 12010 surgical instrument to an open, unlocked condition. Similar to the above, the surgical instrument 12010 may include one or more indicators, such as LED 12100, for example, configured to indicate the status of the surgical instrument 12010. LED 12100 may be in signal communication with the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 12010 and can operate in a mode similar to that described with respect to the 11100 LED, for example. The 12100 LED can be held in position by a 12101 bracket, for example.

[0356] In various cases, the instrument 12010 may include a trigger lock system that can block the advance of the blade 12282 and/or the trigger bars 12280 if the anvil 12090 is not in a closed position, or sufficiently closed. Referring to Figures 104 and 106, instrument 12010 may comprise a pressure member 12400 mounted to cartridge channel 12070, for example, which may force blade 12282 into engagement with a locking portion of handle 12015. When anvil 12090 is rotated to its closed position, the anvil 12090 can push the blade 12282 down away from the latch portion, against the pressure force of the pressure member 12400. At such a point, the blade 12282 can be advanced distally. Similarly, the instrument 12010 may include a pressure member that can force the firing bars 12280 into engagement with a lock portion of the handle 12015, wherein the anvil 12090 can disengage the firing bars 12280 from the lock portion when the anvil 12090 is moved to its closed position.

[0357] The 12010 surgical instrument may comprise a manually operated closing system and a motor driven staple firing system. A portion 12040 of handle 12015 can be grasped by one hand of the user of surgical instrument 12010 and anvil 12090 and latch 12050 can be manipulated by his other hand. As part of closing the 12050 latch, in at least one embodiment, the user may move one of their hands in the general direction of their other hand, which can reduce accidental and incidental movement of the 12010 surgical instrument. The 12010 surgical instrument may be energized by any suitable power source. For example, an electrical cable can run from an external power source and into the 12015 cable. In certain cases, a battery can be stored in the 12015 cable, for example.

[0358] A surgical stapling instrument 13010 is illustrated in Figures 107-110 Figure 107 is a side view of the surgical stapling instrument 13010 illustrated with some components removed and others shown in cross section; The instrument 13010 may comprise a handle 13015, a first driver 13020, a second driver 13030, a shaft assembly 13040, and an end actuator 13012 including an anvil 13050 and a staple cartridge 13055. The shaft portion 13040 and the anvil 13050 may operate as shown and discussed in US Patent No. 5,704,534 entitled ARTICULATION ASSEMBLY FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, which was issued January 6, 1998. The US Patent Disclosure No. 5,704,534 entitled ARTICULATION ASSEMBLY FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS , issued January 6, 1998, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. A 13018 input power cable can connect the 13010 instrument to an external power source. In at least one instance, the external power source may comprise a generator, such as the GEN11 generator manufactured from Ethicon Energy, Cincinnati, OH, for example. In many cases, the external power source may comprise an AC to DC adapter. In certain cases, the instrument may be powered by an internal battery, such as the batteries shown and discussed in US Patent No. 8,210,411 entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT, which was issued July 3, 2012, for example. US Patent Disclosure No. 8,210,411 entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT, issued July 3, 2012, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[0359] In various cases, referring primarily to Figure 107, the anvil 13050 of the end actuator 13012 may be movable between an open position, as illustrated in Figure 107, and a closed position, in which the anvil 13050 is positioned adjacent to, or contact with, the 13055 staple cartridge, as described in more detail below. In at least one such case, staple cartridge 13055 may not be pivotal with respect to anvil 13050. In certain cases, although not illustrated, staple cartridge 13055 may be pivotal with respect to anvil 13050. In at least one such case , the anvil 13050 cannot be pivoted with respect to the staple cartridge 13055. In any event, the user of the instrument 13010 can manipulate the end actuator 13012 in order to position the T-tissue between the anvil 13050 and the cartridge 13055. Once the T tissue has been properly positioned between the anvil 13050 and the staple cartridge 13055, the user can then pull the first trigger 13020 to trigger the instrument closure system 13010. The closure system can move the anvil 13050 relative to staple cartridge 13055. For example, first driver 13020 may be pulled into a pistol grip portion 13016 of handle 13015 to close anvil 13050, as described in more detail, but is below.

[0360] The closing driver may include a closing motor 13105 (Figure 110) configured to move the anvil 13050. A closing motor 13105 can be mounted on the handle 13015 by means of a motor bracket 13101, for example. Squeezing the first driver 13020 from its open position (Figure 108) to its closed position (Figure 109) can energize the closing motor 13105. Referring primarily to Figure 110, the closing motor 13105 may include a rotating output shaft that is operatively engaged with a 13110 closing drive screw. When the 13105 closing drive turns the output shaft in a first direction, the output shaft can rotate the 13110 closing drive screw in the first direction. . Closing drive screw 13110 may be pivotally supported within handle 13015 and may include a threaded portion. The lock driver may further comprise a lock nut threadedly engaged with the threaded portion of the lock drive screw 13110. The lock nut may be restricted from turning with the lock drive screw 13110 so that rotational movement of the 13110 closing drive screw can translate the closing nut. The lock nut may be engaged with, or integrally formed with, a lock hook 13120. When the lock motor 13015 is rotated in its first direction, the lock drive screw 13110 can advance the lock hook 13120 distally. In various cases, the locking hook 13120 can be slidably supported within the handle 13015 by tracks 13122 extending from the handle 13015 which can restrict the movement of the locking hook 13120 to a defined route along an axis. longitudinal. Such axis may be parallel to, substantially parallel to, collinear with, or substantially collinear with, a longitudinal axis defined by the set of axes 13040. The closure driver may further comprise a closure tube 13125 extending distally from the hook. lock tube 13120. Lock tube 13125 may also be part of shaft assembly 13040 and can translate with respect to a frame of shaft assembly 13040. When lock hook 13120 is advanced distally by lock drive screw 13110, the closing hook 13120 can advance the closing tube 13125 distally. A distal end of closure tube 13125 may be operatively engaged with anvil 13050 such that when closure tube 13125 is advanced distally, closure tube 13125 can push anvil 13050 from its open position to its closed. US Patent No. 5,704,534 entitled ARTICULATION ASSEMBLY FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, which was issued January 6, 1998, discloses a manually operated closure system.

[0361] In at least one form, the instrument 13010 may include a locking system switch positioned on the handle 13015, which may be closed when the first actuator 13020 is moved from its open position (Figure 108) to its position. closed (Figure 109). In certain cases, the key lock system may be closed when the first driver 13020 is in its closed position (Figure 109). In either case, when the closing system switch is closed, the closing system power circuit can be closed to supply electrical power to the 13105 closing motor in order to turn the 13105 closing motor in its first direction. , as discussed above. In certain cases, the surgical instrument 13010 may include a microprocessor, and similar to the above, the key closure system may be in signal communication with the microprocessor. When the closing system switch sends a signal to the microprocessor indicating that the first driver 13020 has closed, the microprocessor may allow power to be supplied to the closing motor 13105 to operate the closing motor 13105 in its first direction and moving the anvil 13050 to its closed position. In various cases, the closing motor 13105 can move the anvil 13050 to its closed position, while the first driver 13020 is at least partially actuated and the switch of the closing system is in the closed state. In the event that the user releases the first trigger 13020 and the first trigger 13020 is returned to its non-triggered position, the switch of the closing system can be opened and the power supplied to the closing motor 13105 can be interrupted. Such cases may leave the 13050 anvil in a partially closed position. When the first driver 13020 is actuated once more and the closing system switch has been closed, power can be supplied to the closing motor 13105 once more to move the anvil 13050 to its closed position. In view of the above, the user of the surgical instrument 13010 can trigger the first trigger 13020 and wait for the closing motor 13105 to position the anvil 13050 in its fully closed position.

[0362] In at least one way, the movement of the first trigger 13020 may be proportional to the movement of the anvil 13050. The first trigger 13020 may move through a first range of motion, or trigger, when it is moved between its position open (Figure 108) to its closed position (Figure 109). Similarly, the anvil 13050 can move through a second range of motion, or anvil, when it is moved from its open position (Figure 107) to its closed position. The range of motion of the trigger can match the range of motion of the anvil. The range of motion of the trigger can match the range of motion of the anvil. For example, the actuator's range of motion may comprise about 30 degrees and the anvil's range of motion may comprise about 30 degrees. In such cases, the anvil 13050 may be in its fully open position when the first trigger 13020 is in its fully open position, the anvil 13050 may be rotated 10 degrees towards its closed position when the first trigger 13020 is rotated 10 degrees to its closed position, anvil 13050 can be rotated 20 degrees toward its closed position when the first driver 13020 is rotated 20 degrees to its closed position, and so on. This directly proportional movement between the first driver 13020 and the anvil 13050 can give the user of the instrument 13010 a sense of the position of the anvil 13050 in relation to the staple cartridge 13055 in the event that the anvil 13050 is obstructed from view at the surgical site.

[0363] In addition to the above, the anvil 13050 can be responsive to both the closing and opening movements of the first trigger 13020. For example, when the first trigger 13020 is moved 10 degrees towards the pistol grip 13016, the anvil 13050 can be moved 10 degrees toward the 13055 staple cartridge, and when the first trigger 13020 is moved 10 degrees away from the 13016 pistol grip, the 13050 anvil can be moved 10 degrees away from the 13055 staple cartridge. of the first driver 13020 and the movement of the anvil 13050 can be directly proportional according to a ratio of 1:1, other ratios are possible. For example, the movement of the first actuator 13020 and the movement of the anvil 13050 can be directly proportional according to a ratio of 2:1, for example. In such cases, the anvil 13050 will move 1 degree relative to the staple cartridge 13055 when the first driver 13020 is moved 2 degrees relative to the pistol grip 13016. Also, in such cases, the range of motion of the first driver 13020 may be twice the range of motion of the anvil 13050. In another example, the motion of the first driver 13020 and the motion of the anvil 13050 may be directly proportional according to a ratio of 1:2, for example. In such cases, the anvil 13050 will move 2 degrees relative to the staple cartridge 13055 when the first driver 13020 is moved 1 degree relative to the pistol grip 13016. Also, in such cases, the range of motion of the first driver 13020 can be half the range of motion of the anvil 13050. In many cases, the range of motion of the first trigger 13020 may be linearly proportional to the range of motion of the anvil 13050. In many cases, the motion of the first trigger 13020 may be non-linearly proportional to the movement of the anvil 13050. Regardless of the ratio that is used, such modalities may be possible, through the use of a potentiometer, for example, which can evaluate the rotation of the first drive 13020, as will be discussed in more detail below.

[0364] In addition to the above, with reference to Figures 108-110, the instrument closure system 13010 may comprise a blade potentiometer 13090 that can detect movement of the first actuator 13020. The first actuator 13020 may be pivotally mounted to the cable 13015 via a pivot 13021. First driver 13020 may comprise a gear portion 13070 comprising a plurality of gear teeth extending circumferentially around pivot 13021. When first driver 13020 is rotated proximally toward the grip of the pistol 13016, in addition to the above, the gear portion 13070 can be rotated distally. Correspondingly, when the first driver 13020 is rotated distally away from the pistol grip 13016, the gear portion 13070 may be rotated proximally. The locking system may further comprise a locking hook rack 13080 which is slidably supported within the handle 13015. The locking hook rack 13080 may comprise a longitudinal array of teeth extending along a lower surface of the locking system. same, which faces the gear portion 13070 of the first driver 13020. The gear portion 13070 of the first driver 13020 may be in meshed engagement with the array of teeth defined in the locking hook rack 13080 so that when the first driver 13020 is rotated about pivot 13021, first driver 13020 can displace closing hook rack 13080 proximally or distally, depending on the direction in which first driver 13020 is rotated. For example, when the first trigger 13020 is rotated toward the pistol grip 13016, the first trigger 13020 can displace the closing hook rack 13080 distally. For example, when the first trigger 13020 is rotated away from the pistol grip 13016, the first trigger 13020 may displace the closing hook rack 13080 proximally. Handle 13015 may include a guide slot defined therein, which may be configured to slidably support locking hook rack 13080 and restricting movement of locking hook rack 13080 to a defined route along a longitudinal axis. . Such longitudinal axis may be parallel to, substantially parallel to, collinear with, or substantially collinear with, a longitudinal axis of the set of axes 13040.

[0365] Closing hook rack 13080 may include a detectable element 13081 mounted thereon. Detectable element 13081 may comprise a magnetic element, such as a permanent magnet, for example. Detectable element 13081 may be configured to translate within a longitudinal slot 13091 defined in blade potentiometer 13090 when closing rack 13080 is translated within handle 13015. Blade potentiometer 13090 may be configured to detect element position detectable 13081 within longitudinal slot 13091 and transmit that position to the surgical instrument microprocessor 13010. For example, when the first actuator 13020 is in its open, or non-actuated, position (Figure 108), the detectable element 13081 may be positioned at the proximal end of longitudinal slot 13091 and potentiometer 13090 may transmit a signal to the microprocessor which may indicate to the microprocessor that the first driver 13020 is in its open position. With this information, the microprocessor can hold the anvil 13050 in its open position. As the first trigger 13020 is rotated toward the pistol grip 13016, the detectable element 13081 can slide distally into the longitudinal slot 13091. The potentiometer 13090 can transmit a signal, or a plurality of signals, to the microprocessor which can indicate the position of the first trigger 13020. In response to such a signal, or a plurality of signals, the microprocessor may operate the closing motor 13105 to move the anvil 13055 to a position corresponding to the position of the first trigger 13020. trigger 13020 is in its closed, or triggered position (Figure 109), detectable element 13081 may be positioned at the distal end of longitudinal slot 13091, and potentiometer 13090 may transmit a signal to the microprocessor that may indicate to the microprocessor that the first trigger 13020 is in its closed position. With this information, the microprocessor can move the anvil 13050 to its closed position.

[0366] When the first driver 13020 is pulled so that it is substantially adjacent to the pistol grip 13016 of the handle 13015, as discussed above, the locking hook rack 13080 is moved to its most distal position. When the Closure Hook Rack 13080 is in its most distal position, a Closure Release Button 13140 can engage the Closure Hook Rack 13080 to releasably hold the Closure Hook Rack 13080 in its most distal position and, as a result, releasably hold the anvil 13050 in its closed position. Referring primarily to Figure 108, the lock release button 13140 may be pivotally mounted to the cable 13015 on a pivot 13141. The lock release button 13140 may include a lock arm 13142 extending from the same. When the first driver 13120 is in its non-actuated position and the locking hook rack 13080 is in its most proximal position, the locking arm 13142 may be positioned above and/or against an upper surface of the locking hook rack 13080. In such a position, the locking hook rack 13080 may slide relative to the locking arm 13142. In some circumstances, the locking arm 13142 may be forced against the upper surface of the locking hook rack 13080. As will be described with In more detail below, the instrument 13010 may further comprise a latch 13290 configured to releasably hold the first driver 13020 and second driver 13030 in the inactive configuration illustrated in Figure 108. A spring 13150 may be positioned between the latch 13290 and fire button 13140 which can pivotally force close release button 13140 over pivot 13141 and position lock arm 1 3142 against the top surface of the locking hook rack 13080. In various cases, the 13290 latch may include a proximal projection 13296 and the closure release button 13140 may include a distal projection 13146 which may be configured to hold and align the spring 13150 in the position between latch 13290 and lock release button 13140. When the first actuator 13020 is rotated to its actuated position, as illustrated in Figure 109, the lock hook rack 13080 may be in its most distal position and the latch arm 13142 may be forced into, or may fall into, a notch 13082 defined at the proximal end of the locking hook rack 13080. Also, when the first actuator 13020 is moved to its closed position, or actuated , illustrated in Figures 109 and 110 , first actuator 13020 can proximally push latch 13290, and rotate latch 13290 about pivot 13214. In at least one case, the first actuator The actuator 13020 may include an actuator projection 13025 extending therefrom, configured to engage a distal projection 13295 extending from the latch 13290. Such movement of the latch 13290 may compress the spring 13150 between the latch 13290. and the lock release button 13140, and increase the pressure force applied to the lock release button 13140. Once the lock arm 13142 is engaged with the notch 13082, the lock hook rack 13080 may not be movable, or at least substantially mobile, either in the proximal direction or in the distal direction.

[0367] As discussed above, the first actuator 13020 and the second actuator 13030 may be detachably held in, and/or forced into, their non-actuated positions, illustrated in Figure 108. The instrument 13010 may include a return spring 13210, which includes a first end coupled to pivot 13214 and a second end coupled to a spring assembly 13034 extending from second actuator 13030. Second actuator 13030 may be pivotally mounted to handle 13015 over pivot 13021 and spring 13210 can apply a pressure force to the second actuator 13030 to rotate the second actuator 13030 about the pivot 13021. The latch 13290 can stop the rotation of the second actuator 13030 about the pivot 13021. More specifically, the spring 13150, which Acts to force the 13140 Closing Return Button into engagement with the 13080 Closing Hook Rack, it can also act to push the 13290 Latch Distal so that a 13292 Lock Arm from the t 13290 is positioned behind a boss 13032 defined on the second actuator 13030, which can limit the rotation of the second actuator 13030 and hold the second actuator 13030 in its inactive position, as illustrated in Figure 108. Referring primarily to Figure 110, the second actuator 13030 may comprise a lug 13031, which may be configured to abut the gear portion 13070 of the first actuator 13020, and force the first actuator 13020 to its non-actuated position (Figure 108). When the first actuator 13020 is rotated toward its actuated position (Figure 109), the first actuator 13020 can at least partially rotate the second actuator 13030 toward the pistol grip 13016, against the pressure force provided by the spring 13210 In fact, actuation of the first actuator 13020 can make the second actuator 13030 accessible to the user of the surgical instrument 13010. Prior to actuation of the first actuator 13020, the second actuator 13030 may be inaccessible to the user. In either case, the reader should remember that actuation of the first actuator 13020 proximally pushes the latch 13295. Such proximal movement of the latch 13295 may displace the latch 13295 behind the shoulder 13032 set on the second actuator 13030.

[0368] Once the first actuator 13020 has been moved and locked in its fully actuated position (Figure 109) and the anvil 13050 has been moved to its closed position, as discussed above, the instrument 13010 can be used to clamp the fabric positioned midway between the 13050 anvil and 13055 staple cartridge. If the user is not satisfied with the position of the tissue between the 13050 anvil and 13055 staple cartridge, the user can unlock the 13050 anvil by pressing the lock release button 13140. When the lock release button 13140 is pressed, the lock release arm 13142 of the lock release button 13140 can be pivoted up and out of the notch 13082, which can allow the lock hook rack 13080 to move proximally. Furthermore, the return spring 13210 can return the first driver 13120 and the second driver 13130 to their non-actuated positions illustrated in Figure 109 and, due to the meshing engagement between the gear portion 13070 and the closing hook rack 13080, the return spring 13210 can return the lock hook rack 13080 to its proximal position. Such movement of the closing hook rack 13080 can be detected by the potentiometer blade 13090 which can transmit a signal to the instrument's microprocessor 13010 that the first driver 13020 has returned to its non-actuated position and that the anvil 13050 must be returned to its original position. open position. In response to this, the microprocessor may instruct the closure motor 13105 to rotate in its second direction to drive the closure nut of the closure system proximally and retract the closure tube 13125 proximally which will return the anvil 13050 to its position. open. The user can then reposition the anvil 13050 and staple cartridge 13055 and close the anvil 13050 again by triggering the first trigger 13020 once more. In various cases, the instrument microprocessor 13010 can be configured to ignore input signals from the second trigger 13030 until the potentiometer 13090 detects that the anvil 13050 is in a closed position, or in a sufficiently closed position.

[0369] Once the user is satisfied with the positioning of the 13050 anvil and 13055 staple cartridge, in addition to the above, the user can pull the second trigger 13030 to a closed, or triggered, position so that it is in close proximity. close with the first driver 13020. The driver of the second driver 13030 can press or close a 13180 trip switch on the 13015 handle. In many cases, the 13180 trip switch can be supported by a 13102 motor mount, which can also be configured to support the 13105 trip motor and/or a 13100 trip motor. The 13180 trip switch closure can operate the 13100 trip motor. In certain cases, the 13180 trip switch may be in signal communication with the microprocessor of the surgical instrument 13010. When the microprocessor receives a signal from the trigger switch 13180 that the second trigger 13030 has sufficiently triggered, the microprocessor can supply power to the For the 13100 trip motor. In various modes, the 13180 trip switch closure can connect the 13100 trip motor directly to a direct current (DC) or alternating current (AC) power source to operate the 13100 trip motor In at least one case, the trigger switch 13180 may be arranged so that the trigger switch 13180 is not closed until the second trigger 13030 has reached its fully closed position. Referring primarily to Figure 110, the rotation of the second actuator 13030 may be stopped in its fully closed position when it contacts the first actuator 13020. In at least one such example, the first actuator 13020 may comprise a depression of lock 13023 configured to receive a lock projection 13033 that extends from the second actuator 13030 when the second actuator 13030 reaches its closed position.

[0370] The 13100 trigger motor may include a rotating output shaft that is operatively engaged with a 13190 trigger drive screw of the trigger system. When the 13100 trigger motor is operated to rotate its output shaft in a first direction, the output shaft can rotate the 13190 trigger drive screw in the first direction. When the 13100 trigger motor is operated to rotate its output shaft in a second or opposite direction, the output shaft can rotate the 13190 trigger drive screw in the second direction. The trigger system may further comprise a trigger nut which is threadedly engaged with a threaded portion of the trigger trigger screw 13190. The trigger nut may be restricted from turning with the trigger trigger screw 13190 so that rotation of the 13190 trigger drive screw can translate the trigger nut proximally or distally, depending on the direction in which the 13190 trigger drive screw is turned. The firing system may further comprise a firing shaft 13220 operatively connected to the firing nut which is displaceable with the firing nut. The firing system may also comprise a blade bar 13200 and staple deployment firing bands that extend distally from the firing axis 13220. When the firing motor 13020 is rotated in its first direction, the firing screw 13190 trigger can shift the trigger nut, trigger shaft 13220, blade bar 13200, and trigger bands distally to eject the staples from the 13055 staple cartridge and cut the tissue positioned between the 13050 anvil and staple cartridge 13055. Once the 13200 blade and trigger bands reach the end of the path, the microprocessor can rotate the 13100 trigger motor in its second, or opposite direction, to bring the 13200 blade and bands back to its original position. original position. In various cases, the instrument 13010 may include an end of the trajectory sensor in signal communication with the microprocessor that may signal to the microprocessor that the trigger trigger has reached the end of its trigger stroke and that the trigger stroke must be retracted. Such an end of the trajectory sensor can be positioned on the anvil 13050 and/or the staple cartridge 13055, for example. In certain cases, a decoder operably coupled to the trigger motor 13100 may determine that the trigger motor 13100 has been rotated a sufficient number of revolutions for the blade 13200 and trigger bands to reach their end of trajectory and signal to the microprocessor that the system trigger must be retracted.

[0371] Once the second trigger 13030 has been triggered, however, the instrument 13010 is in its triggering state and the microprocessor can be configured to ignore any inputs from the first trigger 13020 and/or the blade potentiometer 13090 until the system trigger has been returned to its original position. In various cases, the 13010 instrument may include an interrupt button which, when pressed, may signal to the microprocessor that the trigger assembly must be retracted immediately. In at least one of these cases, the firing sequence may be interrupted when the close release button 13140 is pressed. As discussed above, pressing the lock release button 13140 moves the lock hook rack 13080 proximally which, in turn, moves the detectable element 13081 proximally. Proximal movement of detectable element 13081 can be detected by blade potentiometer 13090 which can signal the microprocessor to reverse rotation of trigger motor 13100 to retract trigger assembly and/or operate close motor 13105 to open anvil 13050.

[0372] The 13010 instrument may also include one or more indicators, such as the 13300 LED, for example, which can be configured to indicate the operational state of the 13010 instrument. In many cases, the 13300 LED may operate in a similar manner to the LED 11100, for example. Instrument 13010 also incorporates the ability to pivot end actuator 13012. This is done via pivot knob 13240 as discussed in US Patent No. 5,704,534. Manual rotation of the shaft assembly 13040 is also discussed in US Patent No. 5,704,534.

[0373] In a modular instrument concept 13010, shaft assembly 13040 and end actuator 13012 can be disposable, and attached to a reusable handle 13015. In another embodiment, anvil 13050 and staple cartridge 13055 are disposable and shaft assembly 13040 and handle 13015 are reusable. In various embodiments, the end actuator 13012, including the anvil 13015, the shaft assembly 13040, and the handle 13015 may be reusable and the staple cartridge 13055 may be replaceable.

[0374] Figure 111 is a perspective view of a surgical stapling instrument 14010. The instrument 14010 may comprise a driver, or handle, 14020, a shaft portion 14030, the tubular cartridge housing 14040, and an anvil 14050. Instrument 14010 may further include a closing system configured to move anvil 14050 between an open position and a closed position. Actuator 14020 may comprise a rotary lock button 14075 which can operate the lock system as described in more detail below. Instrument 14010 may further include a trigger system configured to eject staples that are removable stored in cartridge compartment 14040. Actuator 14020 may further comprise a trigger activation trigger 14070 that can operate the trigger as described with more details below. Shaft portion 14030, cartridge housing 14040, and anvil 14050 may operate in a similar manner to that shown and discussed in U.S. Patent No. 5,292,053 entitled SURGICAL ANASTOMOSIS STAPLING INSTRUMENT, which was issued March 8, 1994. US Patent Disclosure No. 5,292,053 entitled SURGICAL ANASTOMOSIS STAPLING INSTRUMENT, which was issued March 8, 1994, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[0375] In addition to the above, the 14020 actuator may include a 14000 transmission and a 14060 slider configured to operate the 14000 transmission. The 14060 slider is movable between a distal position (Figure 115), which is closer to the transmission housing. 14040 cartridge, and a proximal position (Figure 114), which is farthest from the 14040 cartridge bay. When the 14060 slider is in its proximal position, the 14020 actuator is in a first operating mode, or the closing mode, and can move the 14050 anvil towards and away from the 14040 cartridge bay. When the 14060 slider is in its distal position, the 14020 actuator is in a second operating mode, or firing mode, and can eject the 14040 cartridge magazine clamps to the 14050 anvil. When the 14020 actuator is in its close mode, the 14075 rotary close knob can be rotated about a longitudinal axis that extends through the actuator 14020 in order to move the anvil 14050 proximally or distally, depending on the direction in which the closing knob 14075 is turned. When the 14020 actuator is in its firing mode, the 14070 firing activation trigger can be rotated proximally to eject the 14040 cartridge magazine clips. The closing system and firing system are discussed in more detail below.

[0376] The 14020 actuator may comprise an electric motor, such as the 14090 motor (Figures 113-115), for example, which can operate the close actuator and the trip actuator via the 14000 transmission. The 14090 motor may be supported on the interior of an actuator housing 14080 of actuator 14020. Referring primarily to Figure 113, actuator housing 14080 may comprise two halves, a right half of actuator housing 14080a and a left half of actuator housing 14080b. The 14080a and 14080b actuator housing halves can be held together by screws, although any suitable fixing and/or adhesive methods can be used to mount the 14080 actuator housing. The 14090 motor can be supported between the actuator housing halves 14080a and 14080b and may include a pivot axis 14100 extending distally therefrom. In certain cases, the actuator 14020 may comprise a motor mount 14101 positioned in the 14080 housing configured to support the 14100 engine housing and restrict the motor housing from rotating with respect to the 14080 actuator housing. In several cases, the rotating shaft 14100 may comprise an extender portion 14110 affixed thereto. Shaft 14100 and extension portion 14110 may be pivotally coupled so that they rotate together.

[0377] In addition to the above, referring primarily to Figure 116, the extender portion 14110 may comprise a cylindrical, or at least substantially cylindrical, body 14111 and a flat portion 14120 defined at a distal end 14113 of the extender portion 14110. The body The cylindrical end 14111 of the extender portion 14110 may be pivotally supported within the actuator housing 14080 by a bearing 14105. The distal end 14113 of the extender portion 14110 may be positioned within a sliding opening 14114 defined in a sliding member 14115. 14115, as will be discussed in more detail below, is part of transmission 14000 and can be shifted between a proximal position (Figure 114), in which slider 14115 transmits rotational motion from motor 14090 to the closure system, and a distal position (Figure 115), in which the slider 14115 transmits rotational motion 14090 from the motor to the firing system. When the slider 14115 is displaced between its proximal position (Figure 114) and its distal position (Figure 115), the slider 14115 may slide with respect to the extension portion 14110. The slider opening 14114 defined in the slider 14115 may define a perimeter that corresponds, or at least substantially corresponds, to the perimeter of the distal end 14113 of the extender portion 14110 such that, one, the extender portion 14110 and the slider 14115 are rotatably coupled together, and, two, the slider 14115 can translates with respect to the extender portion 14110. In at least one case, the sliding opening 14114 comprises a cylindrical portion 14116 corresponding to the cylindrical body 14111 of the extension portion 14110 and a flat portion 14117 corresponding to the flat portion 14120 defined at the distal end 14113 of the slider 14115.

[0378] In addition to the above, the slider 14115 may comprise a tubular or generally tubular structure. Slider 14115 may comprise a distal end 14118 and a plurality of outer circumferential slots that extend around an outer surface 14130 of distal end 14118 operatively engageable with the trigger, as illustrated in Figure 115 . slider 14115 may further comprise a plurality of inner circumferential braces 14140 defined at the distal end of slider opening 14114, which may be operatively engaged with the closure driver, as illustrated in Figure 114. Slider 14115 may be part of a set of sliding elements 14150. Referring primarily to Figure 116, the assembly of sliding elements 14150 may further comprise an upper journal bearing 14160, a lower journal bearing 14170, the slider element knob 14060, and a slide spring 14180. 14160 upper journal bearing and lower journal bearing 14170 combine to form a journal bearing that can, one, support the slider 14115 with sufficient clearance so that the slider 14115 can rotate within the journal bearing and, two, displace the slider 14115 proximally and distally. Referring primarily to Figure 116, the slider 14115 may include a distal flange 14121 and a proximal flange 14122, extending therefrom which may define a recess 14123 therebetween which is configured to closely receive the journal bearing. When slider knob 14060 is pushed distally, the journal bearing can engage distal flange 14121 to push slider 14115 distally. Correspondingly, when the slider knob 14060 is pushed proximally, the journal bearing can go against the proximal flange 14122 to push the slider 14115 proximally.

[0379] Slider assembly 14150 may comprise a latch configured to releasably hold slider 14115 in position. Referring primarily to Figure 116, slider knob 14060 may comprise a flange 14181 that can be selectively engaging a first depression defined at a first end, or proximal end, of a longitudinal slot defined in driver housing 14080 and a second depression defined at a second end, or distal end, of the longitudinal slot. When flange 14181 is engaged with the proximal depression, flange 14181 can hold the slider assembly 14150 in its proximal position which operatively engages the slider 14115 and closing driver with motor 14090. When flange 14181 is engaged with the distal depression, flange 14181 may hold the slider assembly 14150 in its distal position which operatively engages the slider 14115 and the trigger with the motor 14090. The upper journal bearing 14160 may include a configured journal opening 14161 to slidably receive a shaft 14061 from knob 14060. Button 14060 can be pushed down into journal opening 14161 to disengage flange 14181 from driver housing 14080. Once flange 14181 has been disengaged from driver housing 14080, the 14060 button can be slid into the longitudinal slot defined in the actuator housing 14080 to move the slider 14115 between its proximal and distal positions. The 14180 spring can be configured to press the 14181 flange towards the 14080 trigger housing, and when the 14010 surgical instrument user releases the 14060 button, the 14180 spring can force the 14060 button up to engage the 14080 trigger housing , once again.

[0380] When the slider assembly 14150 is in its proximal position, in addition to the above, the slider 14115 is engaged with a lock nut 14190 of the lock driver. Lock nut 14190 comprises an elongated tubular structure including external lock nut braces 14200 defined at the proximal end thereof. When the slider 14115 is in its proximal position, the inner keys 14140 of the slider 14115 are in meshed engagement with the outer keys 14200 of the lock nut 14190 so that when the slider 14115 is rotated by the motor 14090, the nut Closing nut 14190 is rotated by slider 14115. Closing nut 14190 may be pivotally supported within the actuator housing 14080 by one or more bearings, such as pad 14220, for example, which pivotally supports the distal end of the closure nut 14190. Locknut pad 14220 may be composed of Delrin, Nylon, copper, brass, bronze, and/or carbon, for example. In certain cases, the lock nut pad 14220 may comprise a ball bearing or roller bearing, for example. In various cases, lock nut pad 14220 may be an integral portion of driver housing 14080.

[0381] The lock nut 14190 may comprise a longitudinal opening 14191 defined therein. The closure system may further comprise a closure rod 14230, which may be at least partially positioned within the longitudinal opening 14191. The closure rod 14230 may comprise a thread 14231 defined therein that is threadedly engaged with a thread of lock nut 14210 defined in longitudinal opening 14191. Lock rod 14230 may be restricted from turning with lock nut 14190 so that when lock nut 14190 is rotated in a first direction by motor 14090, the rod lock nut 14230 can be translated proximally by lock nut 14190. As illustrated in Figure 115, a lock rod 14230 can move proximally within longitudinal opening 14191 of lock nut 14190. Similarly, when lock nut 14190 14190 is rotated in an opposite direction, or second direction, by motor 14090, and a closing rod 14230 can be translated distally. by the lock nut 14190. As will be described in more detail below, the lock rod 14230 can be operatively engaged with the anvil 14050 so that when the lock rod 14230 is pulled proximally, the anvil 14050 can be moved towards cartridge housing 14040. Correspondingly, when closing rod 14230 is pushed distally, anvil 14050 can be moved away from cartridge housing 14040. In many cases, a length of closing stroke of the closure system can be measured between the open position and the closed position of anvil 14050. Closing rod 14230 may be at least as long as the length of the closing stroke to accommodate the same.

[0382] As discussed above, the knob 14060 of the actuator 14020 is movable between a proximal position (Figure 114), in which the transmission 14000 is engaged with the closing actuator, and a distal position (Figure 115), in which the transmission 14000 is engaged with the trigger trigger. In this way, the transmission 14000 can be used to selectively couple the closing driver and the firing driver with the 14090 motor. When the user of the surgical instrument 14010 is satisfied with the positioning of the anvil 14050 in relation to the cartridge compartment 14040, the The user may distally displace knob 14060, as illustrated in Figure 115, to disengage slider 14115 from the closing actuator and engage slider 14115 with the trigger. When the slider 14115 is slid distally, the inner keys 14140 of the slider 14115 are disengaged from the outer keys 14200 of the lock nut 14190 so that subsequent rotation of the slider 14115 is not transmitted to the lock nut 14190 and the locking system. closure. Concurrent with disengagement of the sliding element from the closing system, the sliding element 14115 can become engaged with the triggering system. Alternatively, slider 14115 may become disengaged from the closure system as slider 14115 is displaced distally and, due to further distal displacement of slider 14115, slider 14115 may become engaged with the trigger system. Under such circumstances, the 14000 transmission cannot operationally engage the close trigger and the trip trigger with the 14090 engine at the same time. In either case, the trigger system may include a trigger nut 14260, which may be engaged by slider 14115 when slider 14115 is moved distally.

[0383] In addition to the above, referring primarily to Figure 116, the trigger nut 14260 may include an opening 14261 defined therein, which may be configured to receive the distal end 14118 and the slider 14115 therein when the slider 14115 is advanced to its distal position (Figure 115). The opening of the trigger nut 14261 may include keys of the trigger nut 14270 defined around an inner circumference thereof which may interleave with the outer circumferential keys 14130 of the slider 14115. When the outer circumferential keys 14130 of the slider 14115 are engaged with the keys of the trigger nut 14270 of the trigger nut 14260, the slider 14115 can be pivotally coupled with the trigger nut 14260 so that the rotation of the slider 14115 is transmitted to the trigger nut 14260. The actuator 14020 may further comprise a trigger nut pad 14275 that pivotally supports the trigger nut 14260. The trigger nut pad 14275 may comprise a needle bearing, a pad of Delrin, Nylon, and/or other plastic, a metal pad, or a integral part of the 14080 trigger housing, for example. The trigger nut 14260 may further comprise internal threads 14272 defined in an internal surface distal to the opening of the trigger nut 14261. The trigger system may further comprise a trigger tube 14280 threadedly engaged with an internal thread 14272 of the trigger screw. 14260

[0384] In various cases, in addition to the above, the firing tube 14280 may include a thread 14281 defined on an outer surface thereof, which is threadedly engaged with the internal threads 14272. The firing tube 14280 may be restricted to turn the trigger nut 14260 so that when the trigger nut 14260 is turned by the motor 14090 and the slider 14115, the trigger nut 14260 can translate the trigger tube 14280. For example, when the trigger nut 14260 is rotated in a first direction, the trigger tube 14280 can be displaced distally by the trigger nut 14260, and when the trigger nut 14260 is rotated in a second or opposite direction, the trigger tube 14280 can be displaced proximally by the trigger nut 14260. At least a portion of trigger tube 14280 may be positioned within opening 14261 defined in trigger nut 14260. When trigger tube 14280 is displaced proximally, trigger tube 14280 The trigger tube 14280 can move proximally within the opening 14261. When the trigger tube 14280 is displaced distally, the trigger tube 14280 can move distally within the opening 14261. As will be described in more detail below, the trigger tube 14280 can move distally within the opening 14261. 14280 may be operatively connected to a firing member that can eject the clips from the 14040 cartridge magazine when the firing tube 14280 is advanced distally. The trigger tube 14280 can retract the trigger member when the trigger tube 14280 is moved proximally. The firing tube 14280 may be long enough to accommodate the firing stroke of the firing member when the firing member is moved between a non-firing position and a fired position. In many cases, the threaded portion of firing tube 14280 is shorter than the threaded portion of closing rod 14230. In such circumstances, the firing stroke may be shorter than the closing stroke. In other cases, the threaded portion of firing tube 14280 may be the same length as the threaded portion of closing rod 14230. In such cases, the firing stroke may be the same length as the closing stroke. In certain cases, the threaded portion of firing tube 14280 is longer than the threaded portion of closing rod 14230. In such circumstances, the firing stroke may be longer than the closing stroke.

[0385] In addition to the above, actuator 14020 and shaft portion 14030 may comprise an integral system. In various cases, actuator 14020 and shaft portion 14030 may comprise a unitary assembly. In certain cases, actuator 14020 may be disassembled from shaft portion 14030. Figure 34 is a perspective view of surgical stapling instrument 14010 depicting actuator 14020 disassembled from shaft portion 14030. Instrument 14010 may include a or more latches or latches configured to releasably secure the shaft portion 14030 to the actuator 14020. For example, the actuator 14020 may include latches 14025 on its opposite sides, which are configured to releasably secure the shaft portion 14030 to the actuator 14020. Latches 14025 can be slid between a first position where they are engaged with shaft portion 14030 and a second position where they have been disengaged from shaft portion 14030. As described in more detail below, actuator 14020 and shaft portion 14030 may comprise portions of the closure system that are operatively assembled together when shaft portion 14030 is mounted to actuator 14020. D and similarly, actuator 14020 and shaft portion 14030 may comprise portions of the trigger system that are operatively mounted together when shaft portion 14030 is mounted to actuator 14020.

[0386] In addition to the above, referring mainly to Figure 113, the closure system may further comprise a closure fixture 14240 affixed to the distal end of the closing rod 14230. In various cases, a screw may lock the piece. lock fixture 14240 to lock stem 14230 such that lock fixture 14240 is translated distally when lock stem 14230 is translated distally and, correspondingly, translated proximally when lock stem 14230 is translated proximally. Closure fastener 14240 may comprise one or more side extensions that can fit into grooves in actuator housing 14080 to align closure fastener 14240 and closure rod 14230. lock 14230 and lock fastener 14240 rotate when lock rod 14230 is driven by lock nut 14190, as discussed above. Closing fastener 14240 may comprise a closure actuator output of actuator 14020 and may be secured to a shaft portion closure actuator input 14030. The shaft portion closure driver input 14030 may comprise a second fastener 14250, which can be attached to closure fastener 14240 when shaft portion 14030 is mounted to actuator 14020. Closing fastener 14240 can push second fastener 14250 distally when fastener 14240 lock 14240 is advanced distally by lock rod 14230; correspondingly, the locking fastener 14240 can pull the second fastener 14250 proximally when the locking fastener 14240 is retracted proximally by the locking rod 14230.

[0387] The shaft portion closing drive portion 14030 may further comprise one or more tension bands 14252 and 14253 mounted on and extending from the second fastener 14250. Tension bands 14252 and 14253 may be secured to the second fastener 14250 so that the second fastener 14250 can push the tension bands 14252, 14253 distally when the second fastener 14250 is advanced distally by the closing fastener 14240 and correspondingly such that the second fastener 14250 may pull tension bands 14252, 14253 proximally when second fastener is retracted 14250 proximally by closure fastener 14240. In many cases, shaft portion 14030 may be curved, and in at least an example, may include a curved shaft housing 14031 extending from a proximal housing assembly 14032. In certain cases, tension bands 14252 and 14253 may be flexible. is to accommodate a curved route of the locking driving portion of the shaft portion 14030. The locking driving portion of the shaft portion 14030 may further comprise an attachment portion, or trocar, 14258 attached to the tension bands 14253 and 14253. Trocar 14258 may be secured to tension bands 14252, 14253 so that trocar 14258 is advanced and retracted with tension bands 14252, 14253. Trocar 14258 may comprise a distal end, which can be releasably engaged with the anvil 14050 so that the anvil 14050 is advanced and retracted with the trocar 14258 when the anvil 14050 is mounted to the trocar 14258. US Patent No. 5,292,503, referenced above, discusses this in more detail.

[0388] In addition to the above, referring primarily to Figure 113, the firing system may further comprise a firing fixture 14290 affixed to the distal end of the firing tube 14280. In various cases, a bolt may lock the part. trigger attachment 14290 to trigger tube 14280 such that trigger attachment 14290 is translated distally when trigger tube 14280 is translated distally and, correspondingly, translated proximally when trigger tube 14280 is translated proximally. The trigger attachment 14290 may comprise one or more side extensions that can fit into grooves in the trigger housing 14080 to align the trigger attachment 14290 and the trigger tube 14280. The side extensions may also prevent the trigger tube from trigger 14280 and trigger fixture 14290 rotate when trigger tube 14280 is driven by trigger nut 14260, as discussed above. The trigger attachment 14290 may comprise a trigger trigger output of the actuator 14020 and may be attached to a trigger trigger input of the shaft portion 14030. The trigger trigger input of the shaft portion 14030 may comprise a second fixture 14300, which can be fixed to trigger fixture 14290 when shaft portion 14030 is mounted to actuator 14020. Firing fixture 14290 can combine in a tongue-in-groove manner with the secondary trigger attachment 14300. When assembled, trigger attachment 14290 may push second trigger attachment 14300 distally when trigger attachment 14290 is advanced distally by trigger tube 14280; correspondingly, the firing fixture 14290 may pull the second fixture 14300 proximally when the firing fixture 14290 is retracted proximally by the firing tube 14280.

[0389] The trigger driver may further comprise a staple driver 14310 coupled to the second fastener 14300 so that the staple driver 14310 moves proximally and distally with the second fastener 14300. When the staple driver 14310 is moved distally by the second fixture 14300, the staple driver 14310 can eject the staples from the cartridge housing 14040. In many cases, the second fixture 14300 can advance a blade 14320 distally with the staple driver 14310 to sever the tissue captured between anvil 14050 and cartridge housing 14040. Second fastener 14300 can retract staple driver 14310 and blade 14320 proximally when second fastener 14300 is retracted proximally by firing fastener 14290.

[0390] In addition to the above, it can be noted that the portions of the lock system that comprise the lock nut 14190 and the lock rod 14230 and the portions of the trigger system, which comprise the trigger nut 14260 and the 14280 firing tube, can be concentric and nested. The trigger nut 14260 and the trigger tube 14280 can be considered an external mechanism, while the lock nut 14190 and the lock rod 14230 can be considered an internal mechanism. Together with the slider 14115, the lock nut 14190, the lock rod 14230, the trigger nut 14260 and the trigger tube 14280 can comprise the transmission 14000. The concentric and nested arrangement of the transmission 14000 can reduce the space required for closing and tripping systems to create a smaller, more easily secured 14020 actuator. This arrangement also allows the outer mechanism to serve as a support and provide the bearing surfaces for moving the inner mechanism parts. In the embodiment shown, the translation members of the inner mechanism are shown more than the translation members of the outer mechanism. Closing rod 14230 may be, for example, on the order of five centimeters (two inches), while firing tube 14280 is on the order of two and a half centimeters (one inch), for example; however, any suitable lengths can be used. Longer translation members are useful when longer translation distances are required. In the embodiment shown, the internal mechanism, or closing trigger, can trigger a load at a greater distance than the external mechanism or trip trigger. That said, the trigger trigger could trigger a load at a greater distance than the trigger trigger.

[0391] As discussed above, the actuator 14020 and shaft portion 14030 are designed for easy assembly. Firing fixture 14290 comprises a semi-circular lip at the end of a distally extending flange. The semi-circular lip fits into a semi-circular groove at a proximal end of the second trigger clamp 14300. Because the fit is on a semi-circular surface, it is possible to connect the second trigger clamp 14290 with the second trigger clamp 14300 by translating the trigger fixture 14290 to second trigger fixture 14300 in a direction transverse or perpendicular to a general longitudinal axis of the parts. The connection of the parts of the closing set is also facilitated, in general, in the same way. For example, fastener closure 14240 may comprise a distally extending flange. At a distal end of this flange is a semicircular lip extending from a substantially semi-cylindrical portion of the closure fastener 14240. A circumferential groove in a proximal portion of the second fastener 14250 receives this semicircular bead to secure the fastener 14250. Closing fixture 14240 for second fixture 14250. Due to the semi-circular nature of closing fixture 14240, closing fixture 14240 and second fixture 14250 can be mounted and dismounted by transverse or perpendicular translation to the axis overall longitudinal of the parts, thus facilitating quick connection and disconnection of the 14030 shaft portion of the 14020 actuator.

[0392] With general reference to Figure 113, fire trigger 14070 and close button 14075 are still shown in exploded view to better see their interaction with adjacent parts. Closing knob 14075 is rotatable in a first direction, or clockwise, and a second direction, or counterclockwise. When the closing knob 14075 is turned in the first direction, the closing knob 14075 can contact and close the first switch, and when the closing knob 14075 is turned in the second direction, the closing knob 14075 can contact and close a second key. When the first switch is closed by the close button 14075, the 14090 motor can be energized and operated in a first direction, and when the second switch is closed by the close button, the 14090 motor can be energized and operated in a second direction. When the 14090 motor is operated in its first direction, the 14090 motor can drive the 14230 closing rod distally to move the 14050 anvil away from the 14040 cartridge housing, and when the 14090 motor is operated in its second direction, the 14090 motor You can actuate the 14230 Closing Rod proximally to move the 14050 Anvil toward the 14040 Cartridge Slot. The 14075 Closing Knob can be positioned in a central, or neutral, position where neither the first key nor the second key are engaged. closed and motor 14090 is not responsive to close button 14075. In various cases, instrument 14010 may comprise at least one spring, such as spring 14076 for example, configured to push close button 14075 to its neutral position , for example.

[0393] Turning now to trigger trigger 14070, trigger trigger 14070 is pivotally attached to trigger housing 14080 and is spring loaded by a torsion spring 14071 which forces trigger trigger 14070 to a position that is rotated to away from the trigger housing 14080. A trigger switch 14305 located near the trigger trigger 14070 is in a position to be contacted by the trigger trigger 14070 when the trigger trigger 14070 is rotated to trigger housing 14080 against the pressure force of the trigger. torsion spring 14071. Fire trigger 14070 can close fire switch 14305 when fire trigger 14070 is pulled. When trigger switch 14305 is closed, motor 14090 can be operated in a first direction to advance trigger tube 14280 and staple driver 14310 distally. When the trigger trigger 14070 is released, the torsion spring 14071 can move the trigger trigger 14070 back to its non-triggered position and out of contact with the trigger switch 14305. At such a point, the trigger switch 14305 may be in an open condition and the 14090 motor may not be responsive to the 14070 trigger trigger. In various cases, the 14010 instrument may further comprise a 14320 safety latch pivotally secured to the 14080 trigger housing that is swivel between a locked position that locks the trigger trigger 14070 and a second position in which trigger trigger 14070 can be operated to close trigger switch 14035. In either case, motor 14090 can be operated in a second direction to retract trigger tube 14280 and the 14310 staple driver. In certain cases, the 14090 motor can be switched between the first direction and the second direction when the firing system has reached the end of its firing stroke. In some cases, actuator 14020 may further comprise a reversing and key switch which is operable to operate motor 14090 in its second direction.

[0394] In view of the above, a method of using the 14010 instrument is given below, although any suitable method may be used. Furthermore, it was previously described that the actuator 14020 is capable of providing two outputs and the shaft portion 14030 is capable of receiving two inputs to perform two functions. Such functions have been described as closing functions and triggering functions, but the invention is not so limited. Functions can include any suitable functions, such as a pivot function for example. To use actuator 14020, in various cases, a user may first mount actuator 14020 to shaft portion 14030 by moving actuator 14020 toward shaft portion 14030 perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of actuator 14020, as seen in Figure 112. The user can align the open side of the proximal end of the shaft portion 14030 towards the open side of the distal portion of the actuator 14020 and assemble the parts together. Such an assembly can connect the closing and triggering fasteners as discussed above. As also discussed above, latches 14025 on actuator 14020 may engage boss over shaft portion housing 14032 to releasably hold actuator 14020 and shaft portion 14030 together. After assembling the actuator 14020 and the shaft portion 14030, a user can place the slider assembly 14150 in its first position to use the first desired function of the surgical tool of the fixed portion. As discussed above, knob 14060 can be used to position slider assembly 14150 in its first portion.

[0395] With general reference to Figure 114, the inner braces 14140 on the slider 14115 may engage the outer braces 14200 on the lock nut 14190 when the slider assembly 14150 is in its first position. The user can then turn lock knob 14075 to position anvil 14050 with respect to cartridge compartment 14040. As discussed above, lock knob 14075 can be rotated in its first direction to close the first lock switch and move the anvil 14050 away from the cartridge compartment 14040 and its second direction to close the second closing switch and moving the anvil 14050 to the cartridge compartment 14040. In certain cases, closing the first closing switch may close a circuit that operates motor 14090 in its first direction, and correspondingly, closing the second closing switch can close a circuit that operates motor 14090 in its second direction. In certain cases, the first closing switch and second closing switch may be in communication with a surgical instrument microprocessor 14010 that can control the electrical power supplied, including the polarity of the electrical power supplied, to the 14090 motor based on the input a from the first closing brace and the second closing brace. As discussed above, the motor 14090 can rotate the rotating shaft 14100, the extension portion 14110, the slider 14115, and due to the configuration of the transmission 14000, the lock nut 14190. As discussed above, the lock nut 14190 is engaged threaded mode with the closing rod 14230 which displaces the anvil 14050 proximally and distally. Alternatively, the 14230 closing rod could perform some other function.

[0396] When the slider assembly 14150 is in its first position or proximal position, as illustrated in Figure 114, the motor 14090 may be responsive to the close button 14075 and not the trigger trigger 14070. In at least one case , lower journal bearing 14170 of slider assembly 14150 may contact and close a first transmission switch 14340 when slider assembly 14150 is in its first position. In various cases, the first transmit switch 14340 may be in communication with the surgical instrument microprocessor 14010, which may be configured to ignore input from the trigger switch 14305 when the first transmit switch 14340 has been closed. In such circumstances, the user of the 14010 surgical instrument may press the 14070 trigger and the 14090 motor will not be responsive. Instead, in such circumstances, the motor 14090 is responsive to the first and second closing switches, which are actuated by a closing button 14075 to move the anvil 14050. When the slider assembly 14150 is moved to its second position or distal position, as illustrated in Figure 115, the lower journal bearing 14170 is disengaged from the first transmission switch 14340 and the first transmission switch 14340 will return to an open condition. When the slider assembly 14150 is moved to its second or distal position, the lower journal bearing 14170 may contact and close a second transmission switch 14350. In many cases, the second transmission switch 14350 may be in communication with the surgical instrument microprocessor 14010, which can be configured to ignore input from the close button 14075 when the second transmit switch 14350 has been closed. In such circumstances, the user of the surgical instrument 14010 may turn the lock knob 14075 and the motor 14090 will not be responsive thereto. Instead, in such circumstances, the 14090 motor is responsive to the 14305 trigger switch which is triggered by the 14070 trigger trigger.

[0397] In order to move the slider assembly 14150 from its first position to its second position as discussed above, the user may press the slider button 14060 to release the slider button 14060 from its detent and moving the slider assembly 14150 distally to its second position. In such circumstances, slider 14115 may be disengaged from lock nut 14160 and engaged with trigger nut 14260. More particularly, inner braces 14140 on slider 14115 may become disengaged from outer braces 14200 on lock nut 14190 and, furthermore, the outer keys 14130 of the slider 14150 may become engaged with the inner slots 14270 of the trigger nut 14260. At such a point, the user may rotate the safety catch 14320 to its unlocked position to prepare the trigger. trigger 14070 to fire. The user can trigger the trigger system by turning the trigger trigger 14070 counterclockwise as shown in Figure 115 towards trigger housing 14080. As discussed above, the trigger trigger 14070 can contact a trigger switch 14305 which can electrically power motor 14090. Similar to first transmission configuration 14000, motor 14090 can rotate rotary shaft 14100, extension portion 14110, and slider 14115; however, in the second configuration of transmission 14000, slider 14115 rotates firing nut 14260 to translate firing tube 14280.

[0398] In many cases, power may be supplied to the 14010 instrument from an external power source. In certain cases, one or more batteries positioned inside the 14020 actuator could be used. The batteries could be, for example, rechargeable lithium batteries. In some cases, the 14090 batteries and motor can be placed in a removable, sealed compartment that can be cleaned, sterilized and reusable.

[0399] After the 14020 actuator has been used during a surgical procedure, the user can disassemble the 14020 actuator from the 14030 shaft portion. The user can press the 14025 latches to disassemble the 14020 actuator from the 14030 shaft portion. Then the 14020 actuator can be cleaned, sterilized and reused or discarded. Similarly, the shaft portion 14030 can be cleaned, sterilized and reused or discarded. When the shaft portion 14030 is reused, the staples may be reloaded into the cartridge housing 14040. In certain cases, the cartridge housing 14040 may include a replaceable cartridge that can be used to reload the staples. In many cases, several portions of the actuator 14020 may also be combined into a sealed, compartmentalized module that can be easily inserted into and removed from the actuator housing 14080. For example, the motor 14090, the rotating shaft 14100, the extension portion 14110, Slider Assembly 14150, Lock Nut 14190, Lock Rod 14230, Trigger Nut 14260, and Trigger Tube 14280 can be combined into a 14080 Removable Modular Actuator Housing Assembly. 14020 actuator can be part of separate mountable modules. For example, the electronic portions of the actuator 14020, such as the motor 14090 and a battery, may comprise one module, while mechanical assemblies containing rotational and/or translational parts may comprise a second module. In such circumstances, the first module may be sterilized by methods other than the second module. Such circumstances may facilitate the use of, for example, gamma radiation for the second module which may be inadequate to sterilize the first module.

[0400] Various additions to the 14020 actuator are planned. For example, microprocessing can be used to detect the end-of-stroke positions of the closing system and/or tripping system and to signal the 14090 motor when to stop the closing and/or tripping travel. Microprocessor could also be used to determine the type of shaft assembly that is attached to actuator 14020. For example, actuator 14020 may include a sensor in signal communication with the microprocessor in actuator 14020 that a circular stapler shaft assembly is attached to the 14020 actuator or that a set of linear cutter shafts is attached to the 14020 actuator. It is anticipated that the 14020 actuator can power many types of surgical instruments that require at least one, and perhaps two or more, longitudinal motion inputs , for example. In many cases, the 14020 actuator can power a circular stapler, a linear stapler, a right angle stapler, scissors, forceps, and/or other types of surgical instruments, for example.

[0401] Other modifications to the 14020 actuator include the use of multiple motors so that the number of functions employable by the 14020 actuator can be increased. Certain modifications to the 14020 actuator include performing more than two functions with the same motor. For example, a third position of slider assembly 14150 is provided where a third function is driven by a third nested mechanism. In some cases, in addition to the above, the 14150 slider assembly may have a third position, which is an intermediate or neutral position where no function is driven by the 14090 motor.

[0402] Other modifications may include the use of electrical and/or magnetic means to translate the slider 14115 from one position to another. For example, a solenoid can be used to move slider 14115 from one position to another. A spring can preload the slider 14115 to a default position, and energizing the solenoid can move the slider 14115 from the default position to a second position.

[0403] A surgical stapling instrument 15010 is illustrated in Figures 117 and 118. Similar to the above, the instrument 15010 may comprise a handle, a closure system configured to move an anvil 15090 between an open position (Figure 117) and a closed position (Figure 118) with respect to a 15080 staple cartridge and, in addition, a firing system configured to deploy staples from the 15080 staple cartridge and cut the captured tissue between the 15090 anvil and the 15080 staple cartridge. of the surgical instrument handle has been removed from Figures 117 and 118 for the purposes of illustrating various components contained therein. Also similarly to the above, the instrument lock system 15010 may comprise a lock motor 15110, a lock gear train including lock drive screw gear 15160 operatively coupled to lock motor 15110, and a drive screw 15170 operatively coupled to the 15160 closing drive screw gear. In various cases, the 15110 closing motor may be supported by a 15125 motor frame which can further swivel support the 15160 closing drive screw gear. and the 15170 closing driver drive screw. The closing system may further include a 15065 closing button configured to contact and close a 15285 closing switch which, when closed, can operate the 15110 closing motor. In addition to the above, the 15065 close button can be configured to contact a key and closing configured to operate closing motor 15110 in a first direction and closing anvil 15090 and an opening switch configured to operate closing motor 15110 in a second direction and opening anvil 15090.

[0404] In addition to the above, the closing system may further comprise a carriage 15180 configured to engage the anvil 15090 and move the anvil 15090 from its open position (Figure 117) to its closed position (Figure 118). Carriage 15180 may include a threaded nut portion 15175 which is threadedly coupled with a threaded portion of the closing driver drive screw 15170. The carriage 15180 may be restricted from turning with the closing driver drive screw 15170. so that the rotation of the closing driver drive screw 15170 can translate the carriage 15180 proximally and distally, depending on the direction in which the closing driver drive screw is turned 15170. When the closing driver drive screw 15170 is turned in a first direction by the closing driver 15110, the closing driver driving screw 15170 can move the carriage 15180 distally to close the anvil 15090. Correspondingly, when the closing driver driving screw 15170 is turned in a second direction, or opposite direction, by the 15110 closing motor, the trigger drive screw 15170 may move carriage 15180 proximally to open anvil 15090. Carrier 15180 may be at least partially disposed around a cartridge channel 15070 and, in various cases, may be slidably retained in cartridge channel 15070 Referring primarily to Figure 118, the cartridge channel 15070 may include one or more slots 15195 defined on opposite sides thereof, which are configured to slidably receive one or more projections 15185 that extend inwardly from the carriage. 15080. In other circumstances, channel 15070 may comprise projections 15185 and carriage 15080 may comprise slots 15195. In either case, slots 15195 and projections 15185 may be configured to limit the movement of carriage 15180 to a longitudinal route, or substantially longitudinal, for example.

[0405] Carriage 15080 is movable from a first position, or proximal position (Figure 117) to a second position or distal position (Figure 118) to close the anvil 15090. Carriage 15080 may include a crossbar 15081 that is configured to contact and move anvil 15090 when carriage 15080 is moved relative to anvil 15090. In many cases, anvil 15090 can be pivotally coupled to cartridge channel 15070 over pivot 15200 and anvil 15090 can be pivoted about pivot 15200 by carriage crossbar 15081. More specifically, carriage crossbar 15181 may be configured to contact a top surface 15092, or cam, of anvil 15090 and slide along top surface 15092 while carriage 15080 is moved distally to rotate anvil 15090 toward cartridge 15080 positioned in cartridge channel 15070. In some cases, distal end 15091 of anvil 15090 may contact distal end 1508 1 of cartridge 15080 when anvil 15090 reaches its fully closed position. Carriage 15180 can be advanced distally until it reaches its most distal position and/or anvil 15090 is in its fully closed position, which is illustrated in Figure 118. Under various circumstances, carriage 15180 can contact and close a end-of-stroke sensor when the carriage 15180 reaches its most distal position. In certain cases, the limit switch may be in signal communication with a microprocessor of the surgical instrument 15010. When the limit switch sensor is closed by the carriage 15180, the microprocessor may interrupt the power supplied to the closing motor 15110 and stop the advance of car 15180.

[0406] As discussed above, crossbar 15181 of carriage 15180 can contact anvil cam 15090 towards staple cartridge 15080, pushing cam surface 15092 down. The anvil 15090 may further comprise a locking pin 15210 extending from the sides thereof, which may be received in slots 15215 defined in the sides of the channel of the cartridge 15070 when the anvil 15090 is rotated onto the staple cartridge 15080. In In many cases, the locking pin 15210 may contact the closed ends of the slots 15215 when the anvil 15090 reaches its closed position, for example. In some cases, the anvil 15090 may be in a closed position and the latch pin 15210 may not be in contact with the closed ends of the slots 15215. In some cases, the closure system may comprise one or more latches 15190 configured to engage the 15210 lock pin and/or move the 15090 anvil closer to the 15080 staple cartridge. The 15190 locks can be pivotally coupled to the 15070 cartridge channel by a pivot pin 15191 and can be rotated about a pivot axis to engage latch pin 15210. In some cases, latches 15190 may engage latch pin 15210 and position latch pin 15210 against the closed ends of slots 15215. Each latch 15190 may comprise a latch arm 15192, which may slide over lock pin 15210 and push lock pin 15210 down when lock 15190 is rotated distally to its closed position. Each lock arm 15192 can at least partially define a lock slot 15193, which can be configured to receive the lock pin 15210 as the locks 15190 are moved to their actuated positions. Locking arms 15192 and closed ends of slots 15215 may cooperate to trap and/or hold lock pin 15210 in position.

[0407] In addition to the above, latches 15190 can be moved between an unlocked position (Figure 117) and a locked position (Figure 118), through carriage 15180 when carriage 15180 is advanced distally. As anvil 15090 is not moved to its fully closed position by crossbar 15181, latches 15190 may move anvil 15090 to its fully closed position. In various cases, carriage 15180 may include distal cam surfaces 15182 defined therein, which may engage latches 15190 when carriage 15180 is advanced distally. In at least one such case, each of the cam surfaces 15182 may comprise an inclined or angled surface, for example. When the closing driver drive screw 15170 is rotated in its second direction and the carriage 15180 is retracted proximally by the closing driver drive screw 15170, the latches 15190 can be returned to their non-actuated positions. In various cases, instrument 15010 may further comprise one or more pressure springs 15195, for example, which may be configured to rotate latches 15190 proximally when distal cam surfaces 15182 are retracted away from latches 15190. Each latch 15190 may include an opening 15194 indicated therein configured to receive a first end of a spring 15195. A second end of each spring 15195 may be engaged with a spring post 15079 extending from cartridge channel 15070. When latches 15190 are rotated distally from their unlocked positions to their positions locked by carriage 15180, as discussed above, springs 15195 can be elastically stretched such that when carriage 15180 is retracted, springs 15195 can elastically return to their original condition, thereby applying a force to latches 15090 through openings 15194, for example. In either case, when the latches 15190 have been returned to their unlocked positions, the anvil 15090 can be moved relative to the staple cartridge 15080 once again.

[0408] As discussed above, crossbar 15181 of carriage 15180 can contact cam surface 15092 of anvil 15090 to rotate anvil 15090 towards staple cartridge 15080. Carriage 15180 can also be configured to rotate the anvil 15090 away from staple cartridge 15080. In at least one such example, anvil 15090 may comprise a second cam surface defined therein 15093 which can be contacted by crossbar 15181 of carriage 15080 as carriage 15080 is moved proximally by the closing driver drive screw 15170. As the reader will appreciate, the cam surface latch 15092 can be defined on a first side of the pivot pin 15200 and the cam surface of the opening 15093 can be defined by a second side , or opposite side, of pivot pin 15200. The opening cam surface 15093 may extend at an angle to the closing cam surface 15092. In many cases, the opening cam surface 15093 crossbar 15181 may contact and slide relative to aperture cam surface 15093 as carriage 15180 is retracted. The cam opening surface 15093 can be configured so that the degree, or amount, to which the anvil 15090 is opened relative to the staple cartridge 15080 is dependent on the distance the crossbar 15181 is proximally retracted. For example, if crossbar 15181 is retracted a first distance proximal to pivot 15200, crossbar 15181 can rotate anvil 15090 upwardly away from staple cartridge 15080 by a first degree, and if crossbar 15181 is retracted a second distance proximal to pivot 14200, which is greater than the first distance, crossbar 15181 can rotate anvil 15090 upwardly in the opposite direction of staple cartridge 15080 to a second degree which is greater than first degree.

[0409] The closure system described above can allow the user of the surgical instrument to rotate the anvil 15090 between an open and a closed position without having to manipulate the anvil 15090 by hand. The closing system discussed above can also lock or lock the anvil 15090 in its closed position automatically without requiring the use of a separate trigger. To the extent that the user is not satisfied with the positioning of the tissue between the anvil 15090 and the staple cartridge 15080 when the anvil 15090 is in its closed position, the user can re-open the anvil 15090, reposition the anvil 15090 and the staple cartridge 15080 against the tissue, and then close the anvil 15090 once more. The user may open and close the 15090 anvil as many times as necessary before triggering the 15010 instrument's trigger system. The trigger system may comprise a 15120 trigger motor mounted on the 15125 motor frame, a trigger operably coupled to the 15120 trigger motor that includes a 15240 trigger gear, a 15250 trigger drive screw gear, and a 15260 trigger drive screw. Similar to the above, the trigger drive gear train and/or the trigger trigger bolt 15260 may be pivotally supported by the motor frame 15125. The trigger trigger may further comprise a trigger trigger 15055 configured to close a trigger switch 15290 when trigger trigger 15055 is depressed to operate the 15120 trip motor. When the 15120 trip motor is operated in a first direction to rotate the 15260 trigger drive screw in a first direction, the trigger driver can deploy staples detachably stored in the 15080 staple cartridge and cut the captured tissue between the 15090 anvil and the 15080 staple cartridge. 15120 is operated in a second direction to turn the trigger trigger screw 15260 in a second direction, or opposite direction, the trigger trigger can be retracted. Thereafter, the 15090 anvil can be reopened to remove tissue from between the 15090 anvil and the 15080 staple cartridge. In some cases, the trigger trigger may not need to be retracted to open the 15090 anvil. trigger trigger may not engage the 15090 anvil as it is advanced distally. In at least one such case, the trigger driver may enter staple cartridge 15080 to eject staples therefrom, and a blade edge may travel between staple cartridge 15080 and anvil 15090 to cut tissue. The trigger trigger cannot lock the anvil 15090 in its closed position, although embodiments are provided in which the trigger trigger can lock the anvil 15090 in its closed position. Such embodiments could utilize an I-beam, for example, which can engage the anvil 15090 and staple cartridge 15080 and hold them in position relative to each other as the I-beam is advanced distally.

[0410] The 15010 instrument can be powered by an external power source and/or an internal power source. A cable can enter the 15080 actuator housing to supply power from an external power source, for example. One or more batteries, such as battery 15400, for example, can be positioned within the instrument handle 15010 to supply power from an internal power source, for example. Instrument 15010 may further comprise one or more indicators, such as LED indicator 15100, for example, which may indicate the operating state of instrument 15010, for example. The LED indicator 15100 may function in the same way as or similar to the LED indicator 11100 described above, for example. The LED indicator 15100 may be in signal communication with the instrument's microcontroller 15010, which may be positioned on a printed circuit board 15500, for example.

[0411] Previous surgical instruments have used a manually-configured closure system to move an anvil between an open position and a closed position. Various embodiments disclosed herein utilize a motor-driven closure system configured to move an anvil between an open position and a closed position with respect to a stationary staple cartridge. Other embodiments are envisaged in which an anvil can be fixed and a motor-driven closing system could move a staple cartridge between an open position and a closed position. In any case, the motor of the closing system can define the tissue gap between the anvil and the staple cartridge. In many cases, the closing system of the surgical instrument is separate and distinct from the triggering system. In other cases, the closing system and the triggering system may be integral. When the closure system and trigger system are separate and distinct, the surgical instrument user can assess the position of the anvil and staple cartridge in relation to the tissue that needs to be stapled and cut before operating the trigger system.

[0412] As discussed above, an end actuator of a surgical instrument, such as end actuator 1000, for example, can be configured to clamp tissue between an anvil jaw 1040 and a staple cartridge 1060 thereof. When the anvil jaw 1040 is in its closed position, a tissue gap may be defined between the anvil jaw 1040 and the staple cartridge 1060. In certain cases, the end actuator 1000 may be suitable for use with thin tissue, thick tissue, and the tissue having an intermediate thickness between thin tissue and thick tissue. The thinnest tissue and thickest tissue on which the End Actuator 1000 can be properly used for stapling may define a range of tissue thickness for the End Actuator 1000. In many cases, a surgical instrument system may include a cable and a plurality of end actuators mountable to the handle, one or more of the end actuators being of different fabric thickness ranges. For example, a first end actuator may have a first range of fabric thicknesses and a second end actuator may have a second range of fabric thicknesses which is different from the first range of fabric thicknesses. In some cases, the first range of fabric thicknesses and the second range of fabric thicknesses may be discrete while, in other cases, the first range of fabric thicknesses and the second range of fabric thicknesses may partially overlap. Surgical instrument systems may utilize any suitable number of end actuators with different tissue thickness ranges where some of the tissue thickness ranges may at least partially overlap and other tissue thickness ranges may not overlap at all.

[0413] In several cases, in addition to the above, an end actuator staple cartridge, such as end actuator 1000 staple cartridge 1060, for example, may be replaceable. In various cases, the staple cartridge 1060 may be removably locked into position within the lower jaw 1020 of the end actuator 1000. Once locked in position, the support, or tissue contact, the surface of the staple cartridge 1060 cannot move, or at least move substantially, with respect to the lower jaw 1020. Thus, when the anvil jaw 1040 is moved to its closed position, a fixed distance, or tissue gap, may be defined between the anvil jaw 1040 and the surface of the staple cartridge holder 1060. To change this fixed distance, the staple cartridge 1060 can be removed from the lower jaw 1020 and a different staple cartridge can be releasably locked within the jaw 1020. The support surface of the different staple cartridge may be configured to provide a fabric gap different from the fabric gap provided by the staple cartridge 1060. Embodiments are provided in the which a surgical instrument system includes a handle, a plurality of end actuators which can be mounted on the handle, and a plurality of staple cartridges which are replaceably insertable into end actuators. Such an embodiment may allow a user to select an end actuator capable of being used with a range of tissue thicknesses and the staple cartridge selected for use with the end actuator can adjust or tune the range of tissue thicknesses that can be stapled. on the end actuator. In certain cases, a first staple cartridge of the surgical instrument system may include a first type of staple and a second staple cartridge may include a second type of staple. For example, the first staple cartridge may include staples having a first unformed, or unfired, height, and the second staple cartridge may include staples having a second, unformed, or unfired height that is different from the first height.

[0414] The entirety of the disclosures of: US Patent No. 5,403,312, entitled ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC DEVICE, which was issued April 4, 1995; US Patent No. 7,000,818 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING SEPARATE DISTINCT CLOSING AND FIRING SYSTEMS, which was issued February 21, 2006; US Patent No. 7,422,139 entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT WITH TACTILE POSITION FEEDBACK, which was issued September 9, 2008; US Patent No. 7,464,849 entitled ELECTRO-MECHANICAL SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH CLOSURE SYSTEM AND ANVIL ALIGNMENT COMPONENTS, which was issued December 16, 2008; US Patent No. 7,670,334 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING AN ARTICULATING END EFFECTOR, which was issued March 2, 2010; US Patent No. 7,753,245 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS, which was issued July 13, 2010; US Patent No. 8,393,514 entitled SELECTIVELY ORIENTABLE IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE, which was issued March 12, 2013; US Patent Application Serial No. 11/343,803 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING RECORDING CAPABILITIES, filed January 31, 2006, now US Patent No. 7,845,537; US Patent Application Serial No. 12/031,573, entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT HAVING RF ELECTRODES, filed February 14, 2008; US Patent Application Serial No. 12/031,873 entitled END EFFECTORS FOR A SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING INSTRUMENT, filed February 15, 2008, now US Patent No. 7,980,443; US Patent Application Serial No. 12/235,782, titled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT, filed September 23, 2008, now US Patent No. 8,210,411; US Patent Application Serial No. 12/249,117 entitled POWERED SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUS WITH MANUALLY RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, filed October 10, 2008, now US Patent No. 8,608,045; US Patent Application Serial No. 12/647,100 entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATOR DIRECTIONAL CONTROL ASSEMBLY, filed December 24, 2009, now US Patent No. 8,220,688; US Patent Application Serial No. 12/893,461, titled STAPLE CARTRIDGE, filed September 29, 2012, now US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0074198; US Patent Application Serial No. 13/036,647, titled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT, filed February 28, 2011, now US Patent No. 8,561,870; US Patent Application Serial No. 13/118,241 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0298719; US Patent Application Serial No. 13/524,049, titled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A FIRING DRIVE, filed June 15, 2012, now US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0334278; US Patent Application Serial No. 13/800,025 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed March 13, 2013; US Patent Application Serial No. 13/800,067 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed March 13, 2013; US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0175955 entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT WITH CLOSURE TRIGGER LOCKING MECHANISM, filed January 31, 2006; and US Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0264194 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH AN ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR, filed April 22, 2010, now US Patent No. 8,308,040, are incorporated herein by reference.

[0415] As described earlier, sensors can be configured to detect and collect data associated with the surgical device. The processor processes the data received by the sensor from the sensor(s).

[0416] Processor can be configured to execute operating logic. The processor can be configured to perform logical operation. The processor may be one of a number of individual or multi-core (multi-core) processors known in the art. The storage may comprise volatile and non-volatile storage media configured to store a temporal and persistent (working) copy of the operating logic.

[0417] In various embodiments, the operating logic can be configured to process the data associated with the movement, as described above. In various embodiments, the operating logic can be configured to perform initial processing, and transmit the data to the computer hosting the application to determine and generate instructions. For these embodiments, the operating logic can be further configured to receive information and provide feedback to a host computer. In alternative embodiments, the operating logic can be configured to take on a greater role in receiving information and determining feedback. In either case, whether self-determined or responsive to instructions from a host computer, the operating logic can be further configured to control and provide feedback to the user.

[0418] In various embodiments, the operating logic can be implemented in instructions supported by the processor's instruction set architecture (ISA) or high-level languages and compiled into the supported ISA. The operating logic may comprise one or more logic units or modules. Operation logic can be implemented in an object-oriented manner. The operation logic can be configured to run in a multi-tasking and/or multi-threading mode. In other embodiments, the operating logic may be implemented in hardware, as an array of gates.

[0419] In various embodiments, the communication interface can be configured to facilitate communication between a peripheral device and the computing system. Communication may include transmission of collected biometric data associated with position, posture, and/or movement data of the user's body part(s) to a host computer, and transmission of data associated with haptic feedback. from the host computer to the peripheral device. In various embodiments, the communication interface may be a wired or wireless communication interface. An example of a wired communication interface may include, but is not limited to, a Universal Serial Bus (USB). An example of a wireless communication interface may include, but is not limited to, a Bluetooth interface.

[0420] For various modalities, the processor can be packaged together with the operating logic. In various embodiments, the processor can be packaged together with the operating logic to form a System in Package (SiP). In various embodiments, the processor can be integrated into the same matrix with the operating logic. In various embodiments, the processor can be packaged together with the operating logic to form a System on Chip (SoC).

[0421] Various modalities can be described here, in the general context of computer-executable instructions, such as software, program modules and/or engines being executed by a processor. Generally speaking, software, program modules and/or engines include any software element arranged to perform specific operations or implement specific abstract data types. Software, program modules and/or engines may include routines, programs, objects, components, data structures and the like that perform specific tasks or implement specific abstract data types. An implementation of software components and techniques, program modules and/or engines may be stored on, and/or transmitted by, some form of computer readable media. In this sense, computer-readable media can be any available media or media that can be used to store information and that are accessible by a computing device. Some modalities can also be practiced in distributed computing environments, where operations are performed by one or more remote processing devices, which are linked through a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, software, program modules, and/or engines can be located on both local and remote computer storage media, including memory storage devices. A memory such as random access memory (RAM) or other dynamic storage device can be used to store information and instructions to be executed by the processor. Memory can also be used to store temporary variables or other intermediate information during the execution of instructions to be executed by the processor.

[0422] Although some embodiments can be illustrated and described as comprising functional components, software, engines and/or modules performing various operations, it can be understood that these components or modules can be implemented by one or more hardware components, software components and /or a combination thereof. Functional components, software, engines and/or modules may be implemented, for example, by logic (e.g. instructions, data and/or code) to be executed by a logic device (e.g. processor). This logic can be stored internally or externally on a logical device, on one or more types of computer-readable storage media. In other embodiments, functional components such as software, motors and/or modules may be implemented by hardware elements which may include processors, microprocessors, circuits, circuit elements (e.g. transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and so on). ), integrated circuits, application specific integrated circuits (ASIC, "application specific integrated circuits"), programmable logic devices (PLD, "programmable logic devices"), digital signal processors (DSP, "digital signal processors") , field programmable gate array (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor device, integrated circuits, microchips, chipsets and so on.

[0423] Examples of software, engines and/or modules may include software components, programs, applications, computer programs, application programs, system programs, machine programs, operating system software, middleware, firmware, software modules , routines, subroutines, functions, methods, procedures, software interfaces, application program interfaces (API), instruction sets, computer code, computer code, code segments, computer code segments, words, values, symbols or any combination thereof. Determining whether a modality is implemented using hardware elements and/or software elements can vary depending on any number of factors, such as desired computational speed, power levels, heat tolerances, processing cycle provision. , input data rates, output data rates, memory resources, data bus speeds, and other design or performance constraints.

[0424] One or more of the modules described herein may comprise one or more embedded applications implemented as firmware, software, hardware, or any combination thereof. One or more of the modules described here may include multiple executable modules, such as software, programs, data, drivers, application programming interfaces (APIs), and so on. Firmware may be stored in 2016 controller memory and/or 2022 controller memory which may comprise nonvolatile memory-NVM, such as bit-masked read-only memory ( ROM) or flash memory. In many implementations, storing firmware in ROM can preserve flash memory. Non-volatile memory (NVM) may comprise other types of memory including, for example, programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM). , for "electrically erasable programmable ROM"), or battery backed random-access memory (RAM, for "random-access memory") battery-backed as dynamic RAM (DRAM, for "dynamic RAM"), dual-rate DRAM (DDRAM, for "Double-Data-Rate DRAM"), and/or synchronous DRAM (SDRAM, for "synchronous DRAM").

[0425] In some cases, several modalities can be implemented in the form of an article of manufacture. The article of manufacture may include computer readable storage media arranged to store logic, instructions and/or data for performing various operations of one or more embodiments. In various embodiments, for example, the article of manufacture may comprise a magnetic disk, an optical disk, flash memory, or firmware containing computer program instructions suitable for execution by a general-purpose processor or application-specific processor. The modalities, however, are not limited in this context.

[0426] The functions of the various functional elements, logic blocks, modules and the circuit elements described in connection with the modalities disclosed herein may be implemented in the general context of computer-executable instructions such as software, control modules, logic and/or logic modules executed by the processing unit. In general, software, control modules, logic and/or logic modules comprise any software element prepared to perform specific operations. Software, control modules, logic and/or logic modules may comprise routines, programs, objects, components, data structures and the like that perform specific tasks or implement specific abstract data types. An implementation of the software, control modules, logic and/or logic modules and techniques may be stored on, and/or transmitted by, some form of computer-readable media. In this sense, computer-readable media can be any available media or media that can be used to store information and that are accessible by a computing device. Some modalities can also be practiced in distributed computing environments, where operations are performed by one or more remote processing devices, which are linked through a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, software, logic control modules, and/or logic modules can be located on both local and remote computer storage media, including memory storage devices.

[0427] Furthermore, it should be appreciated that the modalities described herein illustrate exemplary implementations, and that the functional elements, logic blocks, modules, and circuit elements may be implemented in various other ways that are consistent with the modalities described. Furthermore, the operations performed by these functional elements, logic blocks, modules and circuit elements can be combined and/or separated by a given application and can be performed by a greater or lesser number of components or modules. As will be apparent to those of skill in the art, upon reading the present disclosure, each of the individual embodiments described and illustrated herein has components and features that can be readily separated from, or in combination with, the features of any one of several others. aspects without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. Any method recited can be performed in the order of the recited events or in any other order that is logically possible.

[0428] It is important to note that any reference to "a modality" or "the modality" means that a specific feature, structure or characteristic described in relation to the modality is included in at least one modality. The appearance of the phrase "in a modality" or "in an aspect" in the specification does not necessarily refer to the same modality

[0429] Unless specifically stated otherwise, it is to be understood that terms such as "processing", "computation", "calculate", "determination", or the like, refer to the action and/or processes of a system of computing or computer, or similar electronic computing device, such as a general purpose processor, a DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein that manipulate and/or transform data represented as physical quantities (e.g. electronics) in records and/or memories into other data similarly represented as physical quantities within memories, records or other such storage devices, transmission or display of information.

[0430] It is important to note that some modalities can be described using the expressions "coupled" and "connected" together with their derivatives. These terms are not intended to be synonymous with each other. For example, some modalities may be described using the terms "connected" and/or coupled to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact with each other. The term "coupled", however, can also mean that two or more elements are not in direct contact with each other, but nevertheless cooperate or interact with each other. With respect to software elements, for example, the term "coupled" can refer to interfaces, message interfaces, application program interface (API), message exchange, and so on.

[0431] It is to be understood that any patent, publication, or other descriptive material, in whole or in part, considered to be incorporated into the present invention by way of reference, will be incorporated into the present invention only if the material incorporated does not conflict with the existing definitions, statements, or other descriptive material presented in this description. Accordingly, and to the extent necessary, the disclosure as explicitly presented herein supersedes any conflicting material incorporated herein by reference. Any material, or portions thereof, which is incorporated herein by reference, but which conflicts with existing definitions, statements, or other descriptive materials presented herein, is incorporated herein only to the extent that there is no conflict between the material embedded and existing description material.

[0432] Revealed modalities have application in instrumentation for conventional open and endoscopic surgery, as well as application in robotic-assisted surgery.

[0433] The embodiments of devices disclosed herein may also be designed to be discarded after a single use, or to be used multiple times. Modalities may, in either or both cases, be reconditioned for reuse after at least one use. Overhaul may include any combination of the steps of disassembling the device, followed by cleaning or replacing specific parts and subsequent reassembly. In particular, embodiments of the device may be dismantled, any number of parts or specific parts of the device may be selectively replaced or removed in any combination. By cleaning and/or replacing specific parts, device modalities can be reassembled for subsequent use in a refurbishment facility, or by a surgical team immediately prior to a surgical procedure. Those skilled in the art will understand that refurbishing a device can use a variety of disassembly, cleaning/replacement and reassembly techniques. The use of such techniques and the resulting refurbished device are all within the scope of this application.

[0434] By way of example only, the modalities described herein may be processed prior to surgery. First, a new or used instrument can be obtained and, if necessary, cleaned. The instrument can then be sterilized. In a sterilization technique, the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plastic or TYVEK bag. The container and instrument can then be placed in a field of radiation that can penetrate the container, such as gamma radiation, X-rays, or high-energy electrons. Radiation can kill bacteria on the instrument and container. The sterilized instrument can then be stored in a sterile container. The sealed container can keep the instrument sterile until it is opened in the medical facility. The device may also be sterilized using any other known technique, including, but not limited to, beta or gamma radiation, ethylene oxide, or water vapor.

[0435] Those skilled in the art will recognize that the components (e.g., operations), devices, and objects described in the present invention, and the accompanying discussion, are used as examples for conceptual clarity, and that various modifications are contemplated. of configuration. Accordingly, as used in the present invention, the specific exemplars shown and the accompanying discussion are intended to be representative of their more general classes. In general, the use of any particular instance is intended to be representative of its class, and the non-inclusion of specific components (eg operations), devices, and objects should not be considered limiting.

[0436] With respect to the use of substantially any plural and/or singular terms in the present invention, those skilled in the art may change from plural to singular and/or singular to plural as appropriate to the context and/or application. The various singular/plural permutations are not expressly shown in the present invention for the sake of clarity.

[0437] The subject described in the present invention sometimes illustrates distinct components contained in, or related to, other distinct components. It is necessary to understand that these represented architectures are merely examples, and that, in fact, many other architectures can be implemented that achieve the same functionality. In a conceptual sense, any arrangement of components to achieve the same functionality is effectively "linked" if the desired functionality is achieved. Thus, any two components mentioned in the present invention that are combined to achieve a specific functionality can be seen as "associated" with each other if the desired functionality is achieved, regardless of architectures or intermediate components. Similarly, any of these two components thus associated can also be seen as being "operablely linked" or "operablely coupled" to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any of these two components capable of being associated in this way may be seen as being "operately dockable" to each other to achieve the desired functionality. Specific examples of operable dockable components include, but are not limited to, physically dockable and/or physically interacting components, and/or those that can interact wirelessly, and/or that interact logically, and/or can interact logically.

[0438] Some aspects can be described using the expression "coupled" and "connected" together with their derivatives. It should be understood that these terms are not intended to be synonymous with each other. For example, some aspects can be described using the term "connected" to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact with each other. In another example, some aspects can be described using the term "coupled" to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical contact or in electrical contact. The term "coupled", however, can also mean that two or more elements are not in direct contact with each other, but nevertheless cooperate or interact with each other.

[0439] In some cases, one or more components may be referred to in the present invention as "configured to", "configurable to", "operable/operational to", "adapted/adaptable to", "capable of", "conformable/ conformed to", etc. Those skilled in the art will recognize that "configured for" can generally encompass active-state components, and/or idle-state components, and/or standby-state components, unless the context dictates otherwise.

[0440] While specific aspects of the present subject matter described herein have been shown and described, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, based on the teachings in the present invention, changes and modifications can be made without departing from the subject matter described herein and aspects thereof. and therefore the appended claims are to encompass within their scope all such changes and modifications as are within the true scope of the subject matter described herein. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that, in general, the terms used herein, and particularly in the appended claims (e.g. bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as "open" terms (e.g. the term "including" shall be interpreted as "including but not limited to", the term "having" shall be interpreted as "having at least", the term "includes" shall be interpreted as "includes, but is not limited to", etc. ). It will further be understood by those skilled in the art that when a specific number of an entered claim recitation is intended, such intent will be expressly recited in the claim and, in the absence of such recitation, no intent is present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims may contain the use of the introductory phrases "at least one" and "one or more" to introduce claim recitations. However, the use of such phrases should not be interpreted as implying that the introduction of a recitation of the claim by the indefinite articles "a, ones" or "an, an" limits any specific claim containing the recitation of the introduced claim to claims that contain only such a recitation, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases "one or more" or "at least one" and indefinite articles such as "one, ones" or "one, ones" (e.g., "one, ones" and /or "one, one" should typically be interpreted to mean "at least one" or "one or more"); the same goes for the use of definite articles used to introduce claim recitations.

[0441] Furthermore, even when a specific number of an entered claim recitation is expressly recited, those skilled in the art will recognize that the recitation should typically be interpreted to mean at least the number recited (e.g., the mere recitation of "two recitations" with no other modifiers, typically means at least two recitations, or two or more recitations). Furthermore, in cases where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B, and C, etc" is used, this construction is generally intended to mean that one skilled in the art will understand the convention (e.g., "a system that has at least one of A, B, and C" may include, but is not limited to, systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). In those cases where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B, or C, etc" is used, this construction is generally intended to mean that one skilled in the art will understand the convention (e.g., "a system that has at least one of A, B, and C" may include, but is not limited to, systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C in together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). It will further be understood by those skilled in the art that typically a disjunctive word and/or phrase having two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, claims or drawings, should be understood to contemplate the possibility of including one of the terms, any of the terms, or both terms, unless the context dictates otherwise. For example, the phrase "A or B" will typically be understood to include the possibilities of "A" or "B" or "A and B".

[0442] With respect to the appended claims, those skilled in the art will understand that the operations referred to therein can generally be performed in any order. Also, although several operational flows are presented in some sequence(s), it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in orders other than those illustrated, or may be performed concurrently. Examples of such alternative orderings may include overlapping, interleaved, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplementary, simultaneous, reverse, or other miscellaneous orderings, unless the context dictates otherwise. Furthermore, terms such as "responsive to", "related to" or other adjectival participles are not generally intended to exclude these variants, unless the context dictates otherwise.

[0443] In summary, numerous benefits have been described that result from employing the concepts described in this document. The aforementioned description of one or more embodiments has been presented for purposes of illustration and description. This description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form presented. Modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teachings. One or more modalities have been chosen and described for the purpose of illustrating the principles and practical application to thus allow the skilled person to use the various modalities and with numerous modifications, as appropriate to the specific use contemplated. The attached claims are intended to define the global scope.

Claims (9)

1. Surgical instrument (14010), characterized in that it comprises: a handle (14020) comprising an electric motor (14090), wherein the electric motor comprises a rotating output; a shaft (14100) extending from the handle, the shaft or handle comprising a longitudinal axis and an end actuator extending from the shaft; a first drive configured to perform a first end actuator function, wherein the first drive comprises a first rotatable drive portion (14190) that is rotatable about the longitudinal axis; a second drive configured to perform a second end actuator function, wherein the second drive comprises a second rotatable drive portion (14260) that is rotatable about the longitudinal axis; and a transmission (14000), comprising: a first operational configuration, in which the transmission operatively connects the rotary output to the first drive; a second operational configuration, in which the transmission operatively connects the rotary output to the second drive; and a switch (14150) configured to switch transmission between the first operational configuration and the second operational configuration. 2. Surgical instrument, according to claim 1, characterized in that the axis defines the longitudinal geometric axis; wherein the end actuator comprises a fastener cartridge (14040) comprising a plurality of fasteners removably stored therein and an anvil (14050) configured to deform the fasteners; wherein the first drive is a closing drive configured to move the anvil toward and away from the fastener cartridge; and wherein the second drive is a trigger drive configured to deploy the fastener cartridge fasteners. 3. Surgical instrument according to claim 2, characterized in that the revolving triggering portion comprises an opening (14261) that extends therethrough, and wherein the closing triggering portion extends through the opening (14261) therethrough. opening. 4. Surgical instrument according to claim 2, characterized in that the transmission further comprises a sliding collar (14115), wherein the key extends from the sliding collar, wherein the key comprises a gripping portion, and wherein the slip collar is capable of sliding in a direction parallel to the longitudinal axis. 5. Surgical instrument according to claim 2, characterized in that the transmission further comprises a slip collar (14115), wherein the slip collar comprises a first set of splines (14140) configured to engage the portion of the swing lock drive, when the transmission is in the first operating configuration, and wherein the collar comprises a second set of splines (14130) configured to engage the swing-shot drive portion, when the transmission is in the second operating configuration. 6. Surgical instrument, according to claim 1 or claim 2, characterized in that the cable comprises: a first actuator (14075) configured to operate the electric motor when the transmission is in the first operational configuration; and a second actuator configured to operate the electric motor when the transmission is in the second operating configuration; 7. Surgical instrument according to claim 6, characterized in that the first actuator is rotatable in a first direction to turn the electric motor's rotary output in a first direction, and wherein the first actuator is rotatable in a second direction. direction to turn the rotary output of the electric motor in a second direction. 8. Surgical instrument, according to claim 6, characterized in that it further comprises: a first sensor configured to detect the operation of the first actuator; a second sensor (14305) configured to detect the operation of the second actuator; and a processor configured to receive signals from the first sensor and the second sensor, wherein the processor is configured to ignore signals from the second sensor when the transmission is in the first operational configuration, and wherein the processor is configured to ignore signals from the first sensor when the transmission is in the second operating configuration. 9. Surgical instrument according to claim 1, characterized in that the end actuator comprises a fastener cartridge (14040).

Images